Lite NVR4232-4KS2 - Video recorder Dahua Technology - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Lite NVR4232-4KS2 Dahua Technology

Network Video Recorder

User's Manual

V4.4.6

ZHEJIANG DAHUA VISION TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD.

General

This manual introduces the functions and operations of the XXX device (hereinafter referred to as "the Device").

Safety Instructions

The following categorized signal words with defined meaning might appear in the Manual.

Signal Words	Meaning
DANGER	Indicates a high potential hazard which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING	Indicates a medium or low potential hazard which, if not avoided, could result in slight or moderate injury.
CAUTION	Indicates a potential risk which, if not avoided, could result i property damage, data loss, lower performance, or unpredictable result.
PS	Provides methods to help you solve a problem or save you time.
TE	Provides additional information as the emphasis and supplement to the text.

Revision History

Version	Revision Content	Release Time
V4.4.6	New UI interfaces and menu tree.New AI functions.	July 2019
V4.4.5	Deletes specifications	June 2019
V4.4.4	Add models: Cooper 1U (S3), Cooper 1U (S3) with 4 PoE Ports, Compact 1U (S3) with 8 PoE Ports Series.	August 2018
V4.4.3	Add Compact 1U 4K(S2) with Wireless and Smart 1U 4K(S2) with Wireless.Add Wi-Fi AP and Repeater functions.4K 1.5U (S2) with 24 PoE ports: Add altitude 5,000 meters.	July 2018
V4.4.2	Add GDPR information.Add FCC information.Update HDD installation.	June 2018
V4.3.2	Add Privacy Protection Notice and update About the Manual.	May 2018
V4.3.1	Add new models and update relevant information.	April 28, 2018
V4.3.0	Delete old models and add new models.Update relevant information.	October 12, 2017
V4.2.0	Add models.	September 21, 2017
V4.1.0	Update POS.Modify pictures with QR code and SN.	September 6, 2017
V4.0.0	Add cloud update module.Baseline switch and update screen interfaces.	August 15, 2017
V3.0.0	Add new modules.Baseline switch and update screen interfaces.Add new models.	May 10, 2016
V1.0.0	First Release.	-

Privacy Protection Notice

Features II

As the device user or data controller, you might collect personal data of others such as face, fingerprints, car plate number, Email address, phone number, GPS and so on. You need to be in compliance with the local privacy protection laws and regulations to protect the legitimate rights and interests of other people by implementing measures include but not limited to: Providing clear and visible identification to inform data subject the existence of surveillance area and providing related contact.

About the Manual

• The manual is for reference only. If there is inconsistency between the manual and the actual product, the actual product shall prevail.
• We are not liable for any loss caused by the operations that do not comply with the manual.
• The manual would be updated according to the latest laws and regulations of related regions. For detailed information, see the paper manual, CD-ROM, QR code or our official website. If there is inconsistency between paper manual and the electronic version, the electronic version shall prevail.
• All the designs and software are subject to change without prior written notice. The product updates might cause some differences between the actual product and the manual. Please contact the customer service for the latest program and supplementary documentation.
• There still might be deviation in technical data, functions and operations description, or errors in print. If there is any doubt or dispute, please refer to our final explanation.
• Upgrade the reader software or try other mainstream reader software if the manual (in PDF format) cannot be opened.
• All trademarks, registered trademarks and the company names in the manual are the properties of their respective owners.
• Please visit our website, contact the supplier or customer service if there is any problem occurred when using the device.
• If there is any uncertainty or controversy, please refer to our final explanation.

The following description is the correct application method of the device. Read the manual carefully before use to prevent danger and property loss. Strictly conform to the manual during application and keep it properly after reading.

Operating Requirement

• Install the PoE front-end device indoors.
- The device does not support wall mount.
- Do not place and install the device in an area exposed to direct sunlight or near heat generating device.
- Do not install the device in a humid, dusty or fuliginous area.
- Keep its horizontal installation, or install it at stable places, and prevent it from falling.
- Do not drip or splash liquids onto the device; do not put on the device anything filled with liquids, in order to prevent liquids from flowing into the device.
- Install the device at well-ventilated places; do not block its ventilation opening.
- Use the device only within rated input and output range.
- Do not dismantle the device arbitrarily.
- Transport, use and store the device within allowed humidity and temperature range.

Power Requirement

• Make sure to use the designated battery type. Otherwise there may be explosion risk.
• Make sure to use batteries according to requirements. Otherwise, it may result in fire, explosion or burning risks of batteries!
• To replace batteries, only the same type of batteries can be used.
• Make sure to dispose the exhausted batteries according to the instructions.
• The product shall use electric wires (power wires) recommended by this area, which shall be used within its rated specification.

• Make sure to use standard power adapter matched with this device. Otherwise, the user shall undertake resulting personnel injuries or device damages.

• Use power supply that meets SELV (safety extra low voltage) requirements, and supply power with rated voltage that conforms to Limited Power Source in IEC60950-1. For specific power supply requirements, please refer to device labels.

• Products with category I structure shall be connected to grid power output socket, which is equipped with protective grounding.
• Appliance coupler is a disconnecting device. During normal use, please keep an angle that facilitates operation.

Foreword....I

Important Safeguards and Warnings....IV

Table of Contents......VI

1 Features....1

1.1 Overview....1

1.2 Features....1

2 Front Panel and Rear Panel....3

2.1 Front Panel....3

2.1.1 NVR41/41-P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2/41-4KS2/41-P-4KS2/41-8P-4KS2/21-4KS2/21-P-4KS2/21-8P-4KS2 Series....3

2.1.2 NVR41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series 3

2.1.3 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series....4

2.1.4 NVR41-8P Series 5

2.1.5 NVR42/42-P/42-8P Series 5

2.1.6 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/41HS-4KS2/41HS-P-4KS2/41HS-8P-4KS2/21HS-4KS2/21HS-P-4KS2/21HS-8P-4KS2 Series....7

2.1.7 NVR/22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2/42-16P/42N/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/42-4KS2/4 2-P-4KS2/42-8P-4KS2/42-16P-4KS2/5224-24P-4KS2/54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/44-4KS2/44-16P-4KS 2/5424-24P-4KS2/58-4KS2/S258-16P-4KS2/48-4KS2/48-16P-4KS2/22-4KS2/22-P-4KS2/22-8P-4K S2/52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E/54-16P-4KS2E/58-16P-4KS2E Series....8

2.1.8 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series....9

2.1.9 NVR48/48-16P Series 11

2.1.10 NVR42V-8P Series....13

2.1.11 NVR21-W-4KS2 Series 14

2.1.12 NVR21HS-W-4KS2 Series....15

2.2 Rear Panel 16

2.2.1 NVR41/41-P/41-8P/41-W Series 16

2.2.2 NVR21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2/21-4KS2/21-P-4KS2/21-8P-4KS2 Series....18

2.2.3 NVR41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series....19

2.2.4 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/21HS-4KS2/21HS-P-4KS2/21HS-8P-4KS2 Series 20

2.2.5 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series....22

2.2.6 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2/22-4KS2/22-P-4KS2/22-8P-4KS2 Series....23

2.2.7 NVR42/42N/42-P/42-8P/42-16P Series....24

2.2.8 NVR52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/5224-24P-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E

Series 27

2.2.9 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series....29
2.2.10 NVR54-4KS2/58-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2/5424-24P-4KS2/5816P-4KS2E Series 31
2.2.11 NVR48/48-16P Series 34
2.2.12 NVR42V-8P Series....36
2.2.13 NVR41-4KS2/41-P-4KS2/41-8P-4KS2 37
2.2.14 NVR41HS-4KS2/41HS-P-4KS2/41HS-8P-4KS2....39
2.2.15 NVR42-4KS2/42-P-4KS2/42-8P-4KS2/42-16P-4KS2 40
2.2.16 NVR44-4KS2/44-16P-4KS2....43
2.2.17 NVR48-4KS2/48-16P-4KS2 Series 45
2.2.18 NVR21-W-4KS2 Series 46
2.2.19 NVR21HS-W-4KS2 Series....47

2.3 Alarm Connection....48

2.3.1 Alarm Port....48
2.3.2 Alarm input port 49
2.3.3 Alarm input and output port....50
2.3.4 Alarm relay specifications ....50

2.4 Bidirectional talk 51

2.4.1 Device-end to PC-end 51
2.4.2 PC-end to the device-end 51

2.5 Mouse Operation....52
2.6 Remote Control 53

3 Device Installation....55

3.1 Device Installation Diagrams....55
3.2 Check Unpacked NVR....55
3.3 About Front Panel and Rear Panel....56
3.4 HDD Installation....56

3.4.1

KS2/21-P-4KS2/21-8P-4KS2/21-W-4KS2 Series 56

3.4.2

NVR41H/41H-P/41H-8P/21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/41HS-W-S2/41HS-4KS2/41HS

-P-4KS2/41HS-8P-4KS2/21HS-4KS2/21HS-P-4KS2/21HS-8P-4KS2/21HS-W-4KS2 Series....57

3.4.3

NVR42/42N/42-P/42-8P/42-16P/42-4K/42-8P-4K/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/22-S

2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2/42-4KS2/42-P-4KS2/42-8P-4KS2/42-16P-4KS2/5224-24P-4KS2/22-4KS2/22-

P-4KS2/22-8P-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E Series 57

3.4.4

NVR44/44-8P/44-16P/54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/44-4KS2/44-16P-4KS2/5424-24P-4KS2/54-1

6P-4KS2E Series 58

3.4.5 NVR48/48-16P/58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2/48-4KS2/48-16P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2E Series.....58
3.4.6 NVR42V-8P Series 59

3.5 CD-ROM Installation....60

3.6 Connection Sample....61

3.6.1

3.6.5 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2/22-4KS2/22-P-4KS2/22-8P-4KS2 Series....65
3.6.6 NVR42N Series 66
3.6.7

NVR42/42-P/42-8P/42-16P/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/5224-24P-4KS2/52-8P-4K

S2E/52-16P-4KS2E Series....66

3.6.8 NVR42-8P-4K/42-4KS2/42-P-4KS2/42-8P-4KS2/42-16P-4KS2 Series....67
3.6.9

NVR54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2/5424-24P-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2E/5816P

-4KS2E Series 68

3.6.10 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P/44-4KS2/44-16P-4KS2 Series 68
3.6.11 NVR48/48-16P/48-4KS2/48-16P-4KS2 Series....69
3.6.12 NVR42V-8P Series 70

4 Local Basic Operation 71

4.1 Getting Started....71

4.1.1 Boot up....71
4.1.2 Device Initialization 71
4.1.3 Reset Password....75
4.1.4 Quick Settings....81

4.2 Camera....108

4.2.1 Connection 108
4.2.2 Remote Device Initialization 112
4.2.3 Short-Cut Menu to Register Camera....116
4.2.4 Image 116
4.2.5 Encode....119
4.2.6 Channel Name 123
4.2.7 Remote Upgrade 124
4.2.8 Remote Device Info....125

4.3 Live View 126

4.3.1 Preview 126
4.3.2 Navigation bar....127
4.3.3 Preview Control Interface....130
4.3.4 Sequence....135
4.3.5 Fisheye (Optional)....137
4.3.6 Test Temperature....140
4.3.7 AI Preview Mode 141

4.4 PTZ....143

4.4.1 PTZ Settings....144
4.4.2 PTZ Control....145
4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions....148
4.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions 150

4.5 Record File 151
4.6 Playback and Search....151

4.6.1 Instant Playback 151
4.6.2 Search Interface 151
4.6.3 Smart Search Playback....157
4.6.4 Mark Playback 158
4.6.5 Playback Image....159
4.6.6 Splice Playback....159
4.6.7 File List....160
4.6.8 Other Aux Functions....162

4.7 AI....162

4.7.1 AI Search....162
4.7.2 Parameters....176
4.7.3 Database 216

4.8 Event Manager 223

4.8.1 Alarm Info 223
4.8.2 Alarm Status....224
4.8.3 Alarm Input 225
4.8.4 Alarm Control 228
4.8.5 Video Detection 229
4.8.6 Audio Detect....237
4.8.7 Thermal Alarm 240
4.8.8 Abnormality....243

4.9 POS....248

4.9.1 Search....248
4.9.2 Settings....249

4.10 Operation and Maintenance 252

4.10.1 Log....252
4.10.2 System 254
4.10.3 Network....257
4.10.4 Maintenance and Management....260

4.11 File Backup....267

4.12 Network....268

4.12.1 TCP/IP 268
4.12.2 Port 270
4.12.3 PPPoE....272
4.12.4 DDNS 273
4.12.5 UPnP 275
4.12.6 Email....277
4.12.7 SNMP 278
4.12.8 Multicast....280
4.12.9 Alarm Centre....281
4.12.10 Register 282
4.12.11 P2P 283
4.12.12 802.1X....286

4.13 Storage 287

4.13.1 Basic....288
4.13.2 Schedule....289
4.13.3 HDD....289
4.13.4 Record Control....289
4.13.5 Advance (HDD Group)....290
4.13.6 HDD Detect 290
4.13.7 RAID....293
4.13.8 Record Estimate....298
4.13.9 FTP 300

4.14 System....302

4.14.1 General 302
4.14.2 RS232 302
4.14.3 Security 304

4.15 Account....307

4.15.1 User 307
4.15.2 Group 310
4.15.3 Reset Password....311
4.15.4 ONVIF User....312

4.16 Output and Display....314

4.16.1 Display 314
4.16.2 Tour....315
4.16.3 Customized Display 317

4.17 Audio 319

4.17.1 File Manage....319
4.17.2 Schedule....321
4.17.3 Broadcast....322

4.18 USB Device Auto Pop-up....324

4.19 Shutdown....324

5 Web Operation....328

5.1 Network Connection....328
5.2 Web Login 328
5.3 Reset Password 329
5.4 Web Main Menu 331

6 Glossary....334

7 FAQ....335

Appendix 1 Cybersecurity Recommendations....340

Appendix 2 HDD Capacity Calculation....343

Appendix 3 Compatible Network Camera List....344

1.1 Overview

This series NVR is a high performance network video recorder. This series product support local preview, multiple-window display, recorded file local storage, remote control and mouse shortcut menu operation, and remote management and control function.

This series product supports center storage, front-end storage and client-end storage. The monitor zone in the front-end can be set in anywhere. Working with other front-end devices such as IPC, NVS, this series product can establish a strong surveillance network via the CMS. In the network system, there is only one network cable from the monitor center to the monitor zone in the whole network. There is no audio/video cable from the monitor center to the monitor zone. The whole project is featuring of simple connection, low-cost, low maintenance work.

This series NVR can be widely used in many areas such as public security, water conservancy, transportation and education.

1.2 Features

Cloud Upgrade	For the NVR connected with the Internet, it supports online upgrade to update applications.
Real-time Surveillance	VGA, HDMI port. Connect to monitor to realize real-time surveillance. Some series support TV/VGA/HDMI output at the same time.Short-cut menu when preview.Support popular PTZ decoder control protocols. Support preset, tour and pattern.
Playback	Support each channel real-time record independently, and at the same time it can support search, forward play, network monitor, record search, download and etc.Support various playback modes: slow play, fast play, backward play and frame by frame play.Support time title overlay so that you can view event accurate occurred timeSupport specified zone enlargement.
User Management	Each group has different management powers that can be edited freely. Every user belongs to an exclusive group.
Storage	Via corresponding setup (such as alarm setup and schedule setup), you can backup related audio/video data in the network video recorder.Support Web record and record local video and storage the file in the client end.
Alarm	Respond to external alarm simultaneously (within 200MS), based on user's pre-defined relay setup, system can process the alarm inputcorrectly and prompt user by screen and voice (support pre-recorded audio).Support central alarm server setup, so that alarm information can remotely notify user automatically. Alarm input can be derived from various connected peripheral devices.Alert you via email/sms.
Network Monitor	Through network, sending audio/video data compressed by IPC or NVS to client-ends, then the data will be decompressed and display.Support max 128 connections at the same time.Transmit audio/video data by HTTP, TCP, UDP, MULTICAST, RTP/RTCP and etc.Transmit some alarm data or alarm info by SNMP.Support WEB access in WAN/LAN.
Window Split	Adopt the video compression and digital process to show several windows in one monitor. Support 1/4/8/9/16/ 25/36-window display when preview and 1/4/9/16-window display when playback.
Record	Support normal/motion detect/alarm record function. Save the recorded files in the HDD, USB device, client-end PC, or network storage server. You can search or playback the saved files at the local-end or via the Web/USB device.
Backup	Support network backup, USB2.0 record backup function, the recorded files can be saved in network storage server, peripheral USB2.0 device, burner and etc.
Network Management	Supervise NVR configuration and control power via Ethernet.Support management via WEB.
Peripheral Equipment Management	Support peripheral equipment management such as protocol setup and port connection.Support transparent data transmission such as RS232 (RS-422), RS485 (RS-485).
Auxiliary	Support switch between NTSC and PAL.Support real-time system resources information and running statistics display.Support log file.Local GUI output. Shortcut menu operation via mouse.IR control function (For some series product only). Shortcut menu operation via remote control.Play the video/audio from the network camera or NVS remotely.

NOTE

The following front panel and rear panel figures are for reference only. The actual product shall prevail.

2.1 Front Panel

2.1.1 NVR41/41-P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2/41-4KS2/41-P-4KS2/41-8P-4KS2/21-4KS2/21-P-4KS2/21-8P-4KS2 Series

The front panel is shown as in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1

1 2 3

Table 2-1

SN	Name	Function
1	HDD status indicator light	The red light becomes on when HDD is abnormal.
2	Power indicator light	The red light becomes on when the power connection is OK.
3	Network status indicator light	The red light becomes on when the network connection is abnormal.

2.1.2 NVR41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series

The front panel is shown as in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2

MTT PMR HDD G0

Table 2-2

Icon	Name	Function
NET	Network status indicator light	The red light becomes on when the network connection is abnormal.
PWR	Power indicator light	The red light becomes on when the power connection is OK.
HDD	HDD status indicator light	The red light becomes on when HDD is abnormal.
IR	Remote control receiver	It is to receive signal from the remote control.

2.1.3 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series

The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3

Line drawing of a power supply unit with three vertical towers and a base panel (no text or symbols on the main diagram)

Table 2-3

Icon	Name	Function
HDD	HDD status indicator light	The blue light is on when the HDD is malfunction.
NET	Network status indicator light	The blue light is on when the network connection is abnormal.
POWER	Power status indicator light	The blue light is on when the power connection is OK.
	USB2.0 port	Connect to peripheral USB 2.0 storage device, mouse, burner and etc.

2.1.4 NVR41-8P Series

The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4

1 2 3 4

Table 2-4

SN	Name	Function
1	Network status indicator light	The red light becomes on when the network connection is abnormal.
2	Power indicator light	The red light becomes on when the power connection is OK.
3	HDD status indicator light	The red light becomes on when HDD is abnormal.
4	USB	USB port

2.1.5 NVR42/42-P/42-8P Series

The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 HDD NET +/-/0 >/-/0 >/-/0 >/-/7 D4/0 >/-/0 End Fm Shift Enter Ret

Table 2-5

Icon	Name	Function
Power button		Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down NVR.
Shift	Shift	In textbox, click this button to switch between numeral, English(Small/Capitalized),donation and etc.
Up/1Down/4	▲\▼	Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down.
		Increase/decrease numeral.
		Assistant function such as PTZ menu.
		In text mode, input number 1/4 (English character G/H/I).
Left/2Right/3	◀\▶	Shift current activated control.
		When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar.In text mode, input number 2(English character A/B/C)/3(English character D/E/F).
ESC	ESC	Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation.
		When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode.
Enter	ENTER	Confirm current operation.
		Go to default button.
		Go to menu.
Record	REC	Manually stop/start recording, working with direction keys.or numeral keys to select the recording channel.
Slow play/8	▸	Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback.In text mode, input number 8 (English character T/U/V).
Assistant	Fn	One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant function: PTZ control and image color.
		Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor.
		In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.
		In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc.
Fast play/7	▸	Various fast speeds and normal playback.In text mode, input number 7 (English character P/Q/R/S).
Play previous/0	|◀	In playback mode, playback the previous video. In text mode, input number 0.
Reverse/Pause/6	||◀	In normal playback or pause mode, click this button to reverse playback. In reverse playback, click this button to pause playback. In text mode, input number 6 (English character M/N/O).
Play Next/9	▶|	In playback mode, playback the next video. In menu setup, go to down ward of the dropdown list. In text mode, input number 9 (English character W/X/Y/Z).
Play/Pause /5	▶||	In normal playback click this button to pause playback. In pause mode, click this button to resume playback. In text mode, input number 5(English character J/K/L).
USB port		To connect USB storage device, USB mouse.
Network abnormal indicator light	Net	Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you.
HDD abnormal indicator light	HDD	HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you.
Record light	1-16	System is recording or not. It becomes on when system is recording.
IR Receiver	IR	It is to receive the signal from the remote control.

2.1.6 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/41HS-4KS2/41HS-P-4KS2/41HS-8P-4KS2/21HS-4KS2/21HS-P-4KS2/21HS-8P-4KS2 Series

The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-6.

Figure 2-6

HDD NET POWER

Table 2-6

Icon	Name	Function
HDD	HDD status indicator light	The blue light is on when the HDD is malfunction.
NET	Network status indicator light	The blue light is on when the network connection is abnormal.
POWER	Power status indicator light	The blue light is on when the power connection is OK.
	USB port	Connect to peripheral USB storage device, mouse and etc.

2.1.7 NVR/22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2/42-16P/42N/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/42-4KS2/42-P-4KS2/42-8P-4KS2/42-16P-4KS2/5224-24P-4KS2/54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/44-4KS2/44-16P-4KS2/5424-24P-4KS2/58-4KS2/S258-16P-4KS2/48-4KS2/48-16P-4KS2/22-4KS2/22-P-4KS2/22-8P-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E/54-16P-4KS2E/58-16P-4KS2E Series

The

NVR22-S2/NVR22-P-S2/22-8P-S2/42-16P/42N/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/42-4KS2/42-P-4KS2/42-8P-4KS2/42-16P-4KS2/5224-24P-4KS2/22-4KS2/22-P-4KS2/22-8P-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E series front panel is shown as in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7

STATUS HDD NET POWER

The NVR54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/44-4KS2/44-16P-4KS2/5424-24P-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2E series front panel is shown as in Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8

STATUS HDD NET POWER 00 00 00 00

The NVR58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2/48-4KS2/48-16P-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2E series front panel is shown as in Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9

Front view of a server rack with indicator lights and ports (no text or symbols visible)

Table 2-7

Icon	Name	Function
STATUS	Status indicator light	The blue light is on when the device is malfunction.
HDD	HDD status indicator light	The blue light is on when the HDD is malfunction.
NET	Network status indicator light	The blue light is on when the network connection is abnormal.
POWER	Power status indicator light	The blue light is on when the power connection is OK.
	USB2.0 port	Connect to peripheral USB 2.0 storage device, mouse, burner and etc.

2.1.8 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series

The front panel is shown as in Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10

Enter Shift Esc Fn Rec OK OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S OK/S

Table 2-8

Icon	Name	Function
Power button		Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down NVR.
Shift	Shift	In textbox, click this button to switch between numeral, English(Small/Capitalized),donation and etc.
Up/1Down/4	▲\▼	Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down.
		Increase/decrease numeral.
		Assistant function such as PTZ menu.
		In text mode, input number 1/4 (English character G/H/I).
Left/2Right/3		Shift current activated control.
		When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar.In text mode, input number 2(English character A/B/C)./3(English character D/E/F).
ESC	ESC	Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation.When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode.
Enter	ENTER	Confirm current operation.
		Go to default button.
		Go to menu.
Record	REC	Manually stop/start recording, working with direction keys.or numeral keys to select the recording channel.
Slow play/8	▶	Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback.In text mode, input number 8 (English character T/U/V).
Assistant	Fn	One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant function: PTZ control and image color.
		Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor.
		In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.
		In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc.
Fast play/7	▶	Various fast speeds and normal playback.In text mode, input number 7 (English character P/Q/R/S).
Play previous/0	|◀	In playback mode, playback the previous videoIn text mode, input number 0.
Reverse/Pause/6	||◀	In normal playback or pause mode, click this button to reverse playback.In reverse playback, click this button to pause playback.In text mode, input number 6 (English character M/N/O).
Play Next/9	▶|	In playback mode, playback the next video.In menu setup, go to down ward of the dropdown list.In text mode, input number 9 (English character W/X/Y/Z).
Play/Pause /5	▶||	In normal playback click this button to pause playback.In pause mode, click this button to resume playback.In text mode, input number 5(English character J/K/L).
USB port	○○	To connect USB storage device, USB mouse.
Network abnormal indicator light	Net	Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you.
HDD abnormal indicator light	HDD	HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you.
Record light	1-16	System is recording or not. It becomes on when system is recording.

2.1.9 NVR48/48-16P Series

The Front panel is shown as follows. See Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-11

Control panel interface with labeled buttons and a circular dial indicator

Table 2-9

Icon	Name	Function
Power button		Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down NVR.
Number button	0-9	Input Arabic number.Switch channel.
Input number more than 10	-/--	If you want to input a number more than 10, please click this button and then input.
Shift	↑	In textbox, click this button to switch between numeral, English(Small/Capitalized),donation and etc.
		Enable or disable tour.
Up/Down	▲\▼	Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down.
		Increase/decrease numeral.
		Assistant function such as PTZ menu.
Left/Right		Shift current activated control, and then move left and right.
		When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar.
ESC	ESC	Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation.
		When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode.
Enter	ENTER	Confirm current operation.Go to default button.
		Go to menu.
Record	REC	Manually stop/start recording, working with direction keys or numeral keys to select the recording channel.
Slow play	▸	Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback.
Assistant	Fn	One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant function: PTZ control and image color.
		Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor.
		In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.
		In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc.
		In HDD management interface, you can click it to switch HDD record information and other information (Menu prompt)
		Realize other special functions.
Fast play	▸	Various fast speeds and normal playback.
Play previous	|◄	In playback mode, playback the previous video.
Reverse/Pause	II ◀	In normal playback or pause mode, click this button to reverse playback.In reverse playback, click this button to pause playback.
Play Next	►|	In playback mode, playback the next video.In menu setup, go to down ward of the dropdown list.
Play/Pause	► II	In normal playback click this button to pause playback.In pause mode, click this button to resume playback.
Window switch	Mult	Click it to switch one-window/multiple-window.
Shuttle(outer ring)		In real-time monitor mode it works as left/right direction key.Playback mode, counter clockwise to forward and clock wise to backward.
Jog(inner dial)		Up/down direction key.Playback mode, turn the inner dial to realized frame by frame playback. (Only applies to some special versions.)
USB port		To connect USB storage device, USB mouse.
Remote control indicator light	ACT	Remote control indicator light.
Status indicator light	Status	If there is Fn indicator light, current status indicator light is null.
Power indicator light	PWR	Power indicator light.
Channel indicator light	1-32	For 4/8/16-channel series product.The corresponding channel light becomes on when system is recording.For 32/64-channel series product:When the light flashes slowly, it means the corresponding channel of 1-16 channel is recording now (Such as channel 1).When the light flashes fast, it means the corresponding channel of 17-32 channel is recording now (Such as channel 17)When the light becomes on, It means the corresponding 2 channels are recoding now (Such as channel 1 and channel 17.).The channel indicator light here does not show the status of the 33-64-channel.
IR Receiver	IR	It is to receive the signal from the remote control.

2.1.10 NVR42V-8P Series

The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-12.

Figure 2-12

Technical line drawing of a three-tiered industrial vessel or storage unit with control panels and indicator lights (no text or symbols)

Table 2-10

Name	Icon	Function
Power button	➊	Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down NVR.
Assistant	Fn	One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant function: PTZ control and image color.Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5 seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor.In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character (small/capitalized) and etc.In HDD management interface, you can click it to switch HDD record information and other information (Menu prompt)Realize other special functions.
USB2.0 port		To connect USB2.0 storage device, USB2.0 mouse, burner and etc.
IR receive window		It is to receive the IR signal from the remote control.
Power indicator light		Power indicator light.
HDD abnormal indicator light		HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you.
Network abnormal indicator light		Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you.
Alarm indicator light		The light becomes on when an alarm occurred.

2.1.11 NVR21-W-4KS2 Series

The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-13.

Figure 2-13

Line drawing of a server rack with two towers and a central control panel (no text or symbols)

Table 2-11

Icon	Name	Function
HDD	HDD status indicator light	The blue light is on when the HDD is malfunction.
NET	Network status indicator light	The blue light is on when the network connection is abnormal.
PWR	Power status indicator light	The blue light is on when the power connection is OK.

2.1.12 NVR21HS-W-4KS2 Series

The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14

Line drawing of a network device with two vertical towers and a central display board (no text or symbols)

Table 2-12

Icon	Name	Function
HDD	HDD status indicator light	The blue light is on when the HDD is malfunction.
NET	Network status indicator light	The blue light is on when the network connection is abnormal.
POWER	Power status indicator light	The blue light is on when the power connection is OK.
	USB2.0 port	Connect to peripheral USB 2.0 storage device, mouse and etc.

2.2 Rear Panel

2.2.1 NVR41/41-P/41-8P/41-W Series

The NVR41 rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15

OUT HIC VAA HERTU BOXV

The NVR41-P rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-16

OUT VGA D:01/01 PoE PORTS DCMIV 2g2

The NVR41-8P rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-17.

Figure 2-17

OUT VGA M1C P-DC2072 PoE PORTB 1357 2488 DC207 sga

The NVR41-W rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-18.

Figure 2-18

Line drawing of a wireless router with two towers and ports (no text or symbols)

Table 2-13

Port Name	Connection	Function
	USB2.0 port	USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
	Network port	10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
12	GND	Ground end
DC 12V DC 48V 12 / 12	Power input port	Power socket.For NVR41 series, input DC 12V/2A.For NVR41-P series, input DC 48V/1.5A.For NVR41-8P series, input DC 48V/2A.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
PoE PORT	PoE port	Built-in switch. Support PoE function.For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.
Wireless AP		Support wireless hotspot function. Use Wi-Fi to connect to the network camera when there is a hotspot.For 41-W series only.

2.2.2 NVR21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2/21-4KS2/21-P-4KS2/21-8P-4KS2 Series

The NVR21-S2/21-4KS2 is shown as in Figure 2-19.

Figure 2-19

DCT2V =0.1 VGA MIC OUT MIC IN HDMI

The NVR21-P-S2/21-P-4KS2 is shown as in Figure 2-20.

Figure 2-20

DC HD PUE PORTS V2A M1G OUT H000 M1G IN

The NVR21-8P-S2/21-8P-4KS2 is shown as in Figure 2-21.

Figure 2-21

DC VBA MCCBT I/O I/O

Table 2-14

Port Name	Connection	Function
DC12V =G^2-	Power input portNetwork port	Power socketFor NVR21-S2/21-4KS2, input DC 12V/2A.For NVR21-P-S2/21-P-4KS2,input DC 48V/1.25A.For NVR21-8P-S2/21-8P-4KS2,input DC 48V/2A.10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
	USB port	USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device and etc.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.• Bidirectional talk output.• Audio output on 1-window video monitor.• Audio output on 1-window video playback.
	GND	Ground end
PoE PORTS	PoE port	Built-in switch. Support PoE function.For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.3 NVR41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series

The NVR41H rear panel is shown as in Figure 2-22.

Figure 2-22

OUT GPIO H10

The NVR41H-P rear panel is shown as in Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23

OUT VBA H-80000 Pall Port1 1 3 DCBOW 4 3 4

The NVR41H-8P rear panel is shown as in Figure 2-24.

Figure 2-24

PGM PGE PORTS 1 3 5 7 DC48V 2 4 6 8

Table 2-15

Port Name	Connection	Function
	USB2.0 port	USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
	Network port	10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
	GND	Ground end
DC 48V/ =G*	Power input port	Power socket.For NVR41 series, input DC 12V/2A.For NVR41H-P series, input DC 48V/1.5A.For NVR41H-8P series, input DC 48V/2A.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
PoE PORT	PoE port	Built-in switch. Support PoE function. For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.4 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/21HS-4KS2/21HS-P-4KS2/21HS-8P-4KS2 Series

The NVR21HS-S2/21HS-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-25.

Figure 2-25

DOCU VGA MDC OUT H-65010

The NVR21HS-P-S2/21HS-P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-26.

Figure 2-26

PoE PORTS 1 2 DC UI Sag 2 4 VGA MGO OUT MIC IN MIC IN

The NVR21HS-8P-S2/21HS-8P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-27.

Figure 2-27

PoE PORTS 1 3 3 7 DO IN 2 4 3 8 VBA MIC OUT MDC IN HSDU10 T111

Table 2-16

Port Name	Connection	Function
	Power input port	Power socket.For NVR21HS-S2/21HS-4KS2, input DC 12V/2A.For NVR21HS-P-S2/21HS-P-4KS2, input DC 48V/1.25A.For NVR21HS-8P-S2/21HS-8P-4KS2, input DC 48V/2A.
	Network port	10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
	USB port	USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device and etc.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
⊥	GND	Ground end
PoE PORTS	PoE port	Built-in switch. Support PoE function.For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.5 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series

The NVR41HS-W-S2 rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-28.

Figure 2-28

Technical line drawing of a three-pin electronic device rear panel with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

Table 2-17

Icon	Name	Function
	Power input socket.	Power socket. Input DC12V/2A.
	Network port	10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
	USB2.0 port	USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, and etc.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
12	GND	Ground end
Wireless AP		Support wireless hotspot function. Use Wi-Fi to connect to the network camera when there is a hotspot.

2.2.6 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2/22-4KS2/22-P-4KS2/22-8P-4KS2 Series

The NVR22-S2/22-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-29.

Figure 2-29

ON OFF DCVSW MCP VDA MTC HOME +/-

The NVR22-P-S2/22-P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-30.

Figure 2-30

PaaS PORTS VDA MIC

The NVR22-8P-S2/22-8P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-31.

Figure 2-31

PN5 PORTS ON GTF VGA MTC

Table 2-18

Port Name	Connection	Function
DC12V	Power input portNetwork port	Power socket.For NVR22-S2/22-4KS2, input DC 12V/4A.For NVR22-P-S2/22-P-4KS2, input DC 48V/1.5A.For NVR22-8P-S2/22-8P-4KS2, input DC 53V 120W.10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
	USB port	USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device and etc.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
	GND	Ground end
PoE PORTS	PoE port	Built-in switch. Support PoE function.For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.7 NVR42/42N/42-P/42-8P/42-16P Series

The NVR42 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-32.

Figure 2-32

VGA RS232 HDMI DC12V ON OFF

The NVR42N series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-33.

Figure 2-33

VGA R5232 HDMI DC12V ON OFF

The NVR42-P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-34.

Figure 2-34

PDS POINTS 1 3 DC48V 2 4 VGA MSI OUT RS232 HDMI 539 DC50V ON OFF

The NVR42-8P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-35.

Figure 2-35

Diagram of a network device rear panel with labeled ports, connectors, and internal components such as GPIO, VGA, RS232, and HOM.

The NVR42-16P series rear panel is shown as below. See

Figure 2-36.
Figure 2-36

PeE PORTS 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 5 10 12 14 15 I/O port ↓ 1 2 ↓ I/O port ↓ 3 4 VGA RS13E MTC I/O port 55°C ⑪

Table 2-19

Name		Function
	Power switch	Power on/off button.
	Power input port	Input DC 12V/5A.For NVR42 series product only.
		Switch power port. Input DC 48//1.04A.For NVR42-P series product only.
		Input AC 100~240V.For NVR42-8P/42-16P series product only.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
1~4	Alarm input port1~4	There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close).When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground.
12	GND	Alarm input ground port.
N1, N2	Alarm output port1~2	2 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1~C1, Group 2: port NO2~C2). Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device.NO: Normal open alarm output port.C: Alarm output public end.
C1, C2
A	RS-485 communication port	RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
B		RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
	Network port	10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
	USB2.0 port	USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
RS-232	RS-232 debug COM.	It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer transparent COM data.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
PoE PORTS	/	Built-in Switch. Support PoE.The 4 PoE series product supports total 48V 50W.The 8 PoE series product supports total 48V 120W.The 16 PoE series product supports total 120W. One PoE port max supports 15W.

2.2.8 NVR52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/5224-24P-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E Series

The NVR52-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-37.

Figure 2-37

Back view of a computer chassis showing internal components like connectors, drive, and ports (no text or labels visible)

The NVR52-8P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-38.

Figure 2-38

Diagram of a network device rear panel showing ports, connectors, and I/O ports with labels like 'VGA' and 'HDMI'

The NVR52-16P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-39.

Figure 2-39

Pc-PORTS 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 VGA HDMI USB TCP F1

The NVR5224-24P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-40.

Figure 2-40

Front view of a network equipment rack with ports, connectors, and connectors (no visible text or labels)

The NVR52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-41.

The following figure takes NVR52-16P-4KS2E series as an example. NVR52-8P-4KS2E series has 8 ePoE ports only.

Figure 2-41

PAS PORTS 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 HDMI VGA RS222 MIC HDMI 30%

Table 2-20

Icon	Port Name	Function
[SWRW]	Network port	10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
	USB3.0 port	USB3.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
RS-232	RS-232 debug COM.	It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer transparent COM data.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
1~8	Alarm input port 1~8	There are two groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4; the second group is from port 5 to port 8. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close).When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground.
12	GND	Alarm input ground port.
NO1~NO3	Alarm output port 1~3	3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1:port NO1~C1,Group 2:port NO2~C2,Group 3:port NO3~C3).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device.NO: Normal open alarm output port.C:Alarm output public end.
C1~C3
A	RS-485 communication	RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
B	port	RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
DC12V	Power input port	Input DC 12V/4A.
Power switch	/	Power on/off button.
PoE PORTS	/	Built-in Switch. Support PoE or ePoE function.For ePoE series product, port 1 to port 8 are the ePoE ports. ePoE port supports 300 meters@100Mbps, 800 meters@10Mbps. Port 9 to port 16 are general PoE ports.The 8 PoE series product supports total 130W.The 16 PoE series product supports total 130W.

2.2.9 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series

The NVR44 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-42.

Figure 2-42

Technical diagram of an electronic device rear panel with labeled ports and connectors

The NVR44-8P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-43.

Figure 2-43

PoF PORTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 VGA RS232 REC WALD OUT 50°C~ eDATA

The NVR44-16P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-44.

Figure 2-44

Pus PORTS 1 2 3 7 9 11 12 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 VGA RS232 BMC VIDEO OUT 55°C- +DATA

Table 2-21

Name		Function
Power switch	/	Power on-off button
Power input port	/	Input AC 100~240V.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VIEDEO OUT	Video output port	CVBS output
1~16	Alarm input port 1~16	There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close).When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground.
12	Video output port	CVBS output
NO1~NO5	Alarm output port 1~5	5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1~C1, Group 2: port NO2~C2, Group 3: port NO3~C3, Group 4: port NO4~C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5, NC5). Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device.NO: Normal open alarm output port.C: Alarm output public end.NC: Normal close alarm output port.
C1~C5
NC5
A	RS-485 communication port	RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
B		RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
CTRL 12V	/	Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V	/	+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A.
	Network port	10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
eSATA	eSATA port	External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD.
	USB2.0 port	USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
RS-232	RS232 debug COM.	It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer transparent COM data.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
PoE PORTS	8 PoE ports	Built-in Switch. Support PoE.The 8 PoE ports series products supports total 48V 120W power. One PoE port max supports 15W.
PoE PORTS	16 PoE ports	Built-in Switch. Support PoE. The 16 PoE ports series products supports total 150W power. One PoE port max supports 15W.

2.2.10 NVR54-4KS2/58-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2/5424-24P-4KS2/5816P-4KS2E Series

The NVR54-4KS2/NVR58-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-45.

Figure 2-45

Diagram of a computer drive rear panel showing power, circuit, and network ports with labeled connectors and ports

The NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR58-16P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-46.

Figure 2-46

P-EP0RTI 1 3 5 7 9 11 12 15 Z 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 15 RG232 VGA HAT HAT1 HAT2 HAT3 HAT4 HAT5 HAT6 HAT7 HAT8 HAT9 HAT10 HAT11 HAT12 HAT13 HAT14 HAT15 HAT16 HAT17 HAT18 HAT19 HAT20 HAT21 HAT22 HAT23 HAT24 HAT25 HAT26 HAT27 HAT28 HAT29 HAT30 HAT31 HAT32 HAT33 HAT34 HAT35 HAT36 HAT37 HAT38 HAT39 HAT40 HAT41 HAT42 HAT43 HAT44 HAT45 HAT46 HAT47 HAT48 HAT49 HAT50

The NVR5424-24P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-47.

Figure 2-47

Front view of a server rack with internal components and connectors (no visible text or labels)

The NVR54-16P-4KS2E series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-48.

Figure 2-48

VGA1 VGA2 RS232 PwE PORTS 1 3 8 7 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

The NVR58-16P-4KS2E series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-49.

Figure 2-49

Pac PdRTB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 VGA1 VGA2 WB222

Table 2-22

Name		Function
	Power switch	Power on-off button
	Power input port	Input AC 100~240V.
	Network port	10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
eSATA	eSATA port	External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD.
ss←→	USB3.0 port	USB3.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4b.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
1~16	Alarm input port 1~16	There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close).When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground.
⊥	Ground	Alarm input ground end.
NO1~NO5	Alarm output port 1~5	5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1:port NO1~C1, Group 2:port NO2~C2, Group 3:port NO3~C3, Group 4:port NO4~C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5, NC5). Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device.NO: Normal open alarm output port.C: Alarm output public end.NC: Normal close alarm output port.
C1~C5
NC5
A	RS-485 communication port	RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
B		RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
CTRL 12V	/	Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V	/	+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A.
RS-232	RS232 debug COM.	It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer transparent COM data.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
PoE PORTS	/	Bult-in Switch. Support PoE or ePoE function.For ePoE series product, port 1 to port 8 are the ePoE ports. ePoE port supports 300 meters@100Mbps, 800 meters@10Mbps. Port 9 to port 16 are general PoE ports.The 16 PoE series product supports total 150W.

2.2.11 NVR48/48-16P Series

The NVR48 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-50.

Figure 2-50

Diagram of an electronic device rear panel showing labeled ports and connectors including VGA, R5232, and network ports.

The NVR48-16P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-51.

Figure 2-51

PoE PORTB 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 VGA RS232 MIC VIDEO OUT SPG- sSATA

Table 2-23

Name		Function
Power switch	/	Power on-off button
Power input port	/	Input AC 100~240V.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VIEDEO OUT	Video output port	CVBS output.
1~16	Alarm input port 1~16	There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close).When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground.
±	GND	Alarm input ground port.
NO1~NO5	Alarm output port 1~5	5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1~C1, Group 2: port NO2~C2, Group 3: port NO3~C3, Group 4: port NO4~C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5, NC5). Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device.NO: Normal open alarm output port.C: Alarm output public end.NC: Normal close alarm output port.
C1~C5
NC5
A	RS-485 communication port	RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
B		RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
CTRL 12V	/	Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V	/Network port	+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A.One 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
eSATA	eSATA port	External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD.
	USB2.0 port	USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
RS-232	RS-232 debug COM.	It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer transparent COM data.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
PoE PORTS	16 PoE ports	Built-in Switch. Support PoE. The 16 PoE ports series products supports total 150W power. One PoE port max supports 15W.

2.2.12 NVR42V-8P Series

The interface is shown as in Figure 2-52.

Figure 2-52

PoE PORTS VGA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MIC IN OUT HOUTTM SP

Table 2-24

Name		Function
Power switch	/	Power on/off button.
	Power input port	Input DC 53V--2.3A
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
1~2	Alarm input port1~2	When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground.
12	GND	Alarm input ground port.
C	Alarm output public port	Alarm output public end.
NO	Normal open	Normal open alarm output port.
	Network port	10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
SS	USB3.0 port	USB3.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
PoE PORT	/	Bult-in Switch. Support PoE.The 8 PoE series product supports total 48V 120W.One PoE port max supports 15W.

2.2.13 NVR41-4KS2/41-P-4KS2/41-8P-4KS2

The NVR41-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-53.

Figure 2-53

DC12V VGA HG HDMI

The NVR41-P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-54.

Figure 2-54

PoE PORTS 1 3 3 4 1 2 + C + VGA MIG OUT MIG IM HESIWI

The NVR41-8P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-55.

Figure 2-55

DC 10 2.45 PeE PORTB VGA HSC USB HSC USB

Table 2-25

Port Name	Connection	Function
	USB port	USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
	Network port	10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
	GND	Ground end
DC12V / DC IN	Power input port	Power socket.For NVR41-4KS2: DC 12V/2A power.For NVR41-P-4KS2: DC 48V/72W power.For NVR41-8P-4KS2: DC 48V/96W power.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
PoE PORT	PoE port	Built-in switch. Support PoE function.For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.14 NVR41HS-4KS2/41HS-P-4KS2/41HS-8P-4KS2

The NVR41HS-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-56.

Figure 2-56

1 X + G + + DIG OUT VGA I/O D-320V I/O

The NVR41HS-P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-57.

Figure 2-57

PoE PORTS 1 2 DC IN 2 4 VGA MIC OUT MIC IN HEDLINE

The NVR41HS-8P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-58.

Figure 2-58

PeE PORT8 1 3 5 7 DC IN 1 4 6 8 1 2 + C + VGA MIC IN HOC OUT I HESOU

Table 2-26

Port Name	Connection	Function
	USB port	USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
DC12V / DC IN	Power input port	Power socket.For NVR41HS-4KS2: DC 12V/2A power.For NVR41HS-P-4KS2: DC 48V/72W power.For NVR41HS-8P-4KS2: DC 48V/96W power.
	Network port	10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
	USB port	USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device and etc.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
±	GND	Ground end
PoE PORTS	PoE port	Built-in switch. Support PoE function.For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.15 NVR42-4KS2/42-P-4KS2/42-8P-4KS2/42-16P-4KS2

The NVR42-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-59.

Figure 2-59

SP MTC VGA HDMI DC1W ON OFF

The NVR42-P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-60.

Figure 2-60

ON OFF DS IN PME PORTS 1 3 2 4 SS+ MDC VGA HDMI

The NVR42-8P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-61.

Figure 2-61

PGE PORTS 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 GPIO VGA HDMI

The NVR42-16P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-62.

Figure 2-62

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 PrePORTS VGA RS232 HDMI SS MIC

Table 2-27

Name		Function
[XABA]	Power switch	Power on/off button.
	Power input port	Input DC 12V/4A.For NVR42-4KS2 series product only.
		Switch power port. Input DC 48/96WFor NVR42-P-4KS2 series product only.
		Input AC90V~264V-12V5A/52V2.5A-190W.For NVR42-8P-4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS2 series product only.
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
1~4	Alarm input port1~4	There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close).When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground.
±	GND	Alarm input ground port.
N1, N2	Alarm output port1~2	2 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1:port NO1~C1, Group 2:port NO2~C2). Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device.NO: Normal open alarm output port.C: Alarm output public end.
C1, C2
A	RS-485 communication port	RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
B		RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
	Network port	10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
	USB port	USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
RS-232	RS-232 debug COM.	It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer transparent COM data.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
PoE PORTS	/	Built-in Switch. Support PoE.For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.16 NVR44-4KS2/44-16P-4KS2

The NVR44-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-63.

Figure 2-63

Labeled diagram of a device rear panel showing internal components like battery, connectors, and ports like RS232, VGA, HDMI, and I/O ports.

The NVR44-16P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-64.

Figure 2-64

PUE PORTS 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 MIC RS232 VGA HDTV 12:54:15:16:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 HDTV HDTV HDTV

Table 2-28

Name		Function
Power switch	/	Power on-off button
Power input port	/	AC90V~264V-12V12.5A/-53V2.83A
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VIEDEO OUT	Video output port	CVBS output
1~16	Alarm input port 1~16	There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close).When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground.
±	Video output port	CVBS output
NO1~NO5	Alarm output port 1~5	5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1:port NO1~C1, Group 2:port NO2~C2, Group 3:port NO3~C3, Group 4:port NO4~C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5, NC5). Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device.NO: Normal open alarm output port.C: Alarm output public end.NC: Normal close alarm output port.
C1~C5
NC5
A	RS-485 communication port	RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
B		RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
CTRL 12V	/	Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V	/	+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A.
	Network port	10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
eSATA	eSATA port	External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD.
	USB2.0 port	USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
RS-232	RS232 debug COM.	It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer transparent COM data.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
PoE PORTS	PoE port	Built-in Switch. Support PoE.For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.17 NVR48-4KS2/48-16P-4KS2 Series

The NVR48-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-65.

Figure 2-65

Technical diagram of an electronic device rear panel with labeled ports and connectors

The NVR48-16P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-66.

Figure 2-66

PxE PORTS 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 I/O VGA RS232 HORN USB

Table 2-29

Name		Function
Power switch	/	Power on-off button
Power input port	/	AC90V~264V-12V12.5A/-53V2.83A
MIC IN	Audio input port	Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.
MIC OUT	Audio output port	Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.Bidirectional talk output.Audio output on 1-window video monitor.Audio output on 1-window video playback.
VIEDEO OUT	Video output port	CVBS output.
1~16	Alarm input port 1~16	There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close).When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground.
[2347]	GND	Alarm input ground port.
NO1~NO5	Alarm output port 1~5	5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1:port NO1~C1, Group 2:port NO2~C2, Group 3:port NO3~C3, Group 4:port NO4~C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5, NC5). Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device.NO: Normal open alarm output port.C: Alarm output public end.NC: Normal close alarm output port.
C1~C5
NC5
A	RS-485 communication port	RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
B		RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
CTRL 12V	/	Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V	/	+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A.
	Network port	One 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
eSATA	eSATA port	External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD.
[2HA2]	USB port	USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
RS-232	RS-232 debug COM.	It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer transparent COM data.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
PoE PORTS	PoE port	Built-in Switch. Support PoE.For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera.

2.2.18 NVR21-W-4KS2 Series

The rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-67.

Figure 2-67

Line drawing of a wireless router with two towers and four ports (no text or symbols)

Table 2-30

Port Name	Connection	Function
	USB2.0 port	USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc.
	Network port	10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
	Power input port	Input DC 12V/2A.
WPS/RESET	Reset/WPS function	Device Wi-Fi reset and WPS function button:● Hold down this button for 5 seconds and above to restore Wi-Fi AP to defaults.● Press this button for less than 2 seconds, and then press the WPS button of Wi-Fi IPC, the device and Wi-Fi IPC can be connected.

2.2.19 NVR21HS-W-4KS2 Series

The rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-68.

Figure 2-68

Front view of a network device rear panel with ports and connectors (no text or symbols visible)

Table 2-31

Icon	Name	Function
DC12V	Power input socket.	Power socket. Input DC12V/2A.
	Network port	10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable.
	USB2.0 port	USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, and etc.
HDMI	High Definition Media Interface	High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.
VGA	VGA video output port	VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.
	GND	Ground end
WPS/RESET	Reset/WPS function	Device Wi-Fi reset and WPS function button:Hold down this button for 5 seconds and above to restore Wi-Fi AP to defaults.Press this button for less than 2 seconds, and then press the WPS button of Wi-Fi IPC, the device and Wi-Fi IPC can be connected.

2.3 Alarm Connection

2.3.1 Alarm Port

The alarm port is shown as below. See Figure 2-69. The following figure for reference only.

Figure 2-69

Icon	Function
1~16	ALARM1~ALARM16. The alarm becomes activated in the low level.
NO1 C1, NO2 C2, NO3 C3, NO4 C4	Four NO activation output groups. (On-off button).
NO5 C5 NC5	One NO/NC activation output group. (On-off button).
CTRL 12V	Control power output. Disable power output when alarm is canceled. Current is 500mA.
+12V	Rated current output. Current is 500mA.
	GND
A/B	485 communication port. They are used to control devices such as PTZ. Please parallel connect 120TΩ between A/B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders.

Note

• Different models support different alarm input ports. Please refer to the specifications sheet for detailed information.
• Slight difference may be found on the alarm port layout.

2.3.2 Alarm input port

Connect the positive end (+) of the alarm input device to the alarm input port (ALARM IN 1\~16) of the

NVR. Connect the negative end (-) of the alarm input device to the ground end ( ) of the NVR.

Figure 2-70

Alarm + Device - • • • Alarm + Device - • • • 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NO5 C5 NC5 CTRL 12V +12V ± ± A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NO1 C1 NO2 C2 NO3 C3 NO4 C4 ± ± • • • + Alarm - • • • Device Device

NOTE

● There are two alarm input types: NO/NC.
- When connect the ground port of the alarm device to the NVR, you can use any of the GND ports

• Connect the NC port of the alarm device to the alarm input port (ALARM) of the NVR.
• When there is peripheral power supplying for the alarm device, please make sure it is earthed with the NVR.

2.3.3 Alarm input and output port

● There is peripheral power supplying for the external alarm device.
- In case overload may result in NVR damage, please refer to the following relay specifications for detailed information.
● A/B cable of the RS485 is for the A/B cable connection of the speed PTZ.

2.3.4 Alarm relay specifications

Table 2-33

Model: JRC-27F
Material of the touch	Silver
Rating (Resistance Load)	Rated switch capacity	30VDC 2A, 125VAC 1A
	Maximum switch power	125VA 160W
	Maximum switch voltage	250VAC, 220VDC
	Maximum switch currency	1A
Insulation	Between touches with same polarity	1000VAC 1minute
	Between touches with different polarity	1000VAC 1minute
	Between touch and winding	1000VAC 1minute
Surge voltage	Between touches with same polarity	1500V (10×160us)
Length of open time	3ms max
Length of close time	3ms max
Longevity	Mechanical	50×106 MIN (3Hz)
	Electrical	200×103 MIN (0.5Hz)
Temperature	-40°C - +70°C

2.4 Bidirectional talk

2.4.1 Device-end to PC-end

Device Connection

Please connect the speaker or the pickup to the first audio input port in the device rear panel. Then connect the earphone or the sound box to the audio output port in the PC.

Login the Web and then enable the corresponding channel real-time monitor.

Please refer to the following interface to enable bidirectional talk. See Figure 2-71.

Figure 2-71

Start Talk DEFAULT G711a G711u PCM

Listening Operation

At the device end, speak via the speaker or the pickup, and then you can get the audio from the earphone or sound box at the pc-end. See Figure 2-72.

Figure 2-72

graph LR
    A["Device"] -->|Signal Transmission| B["Internet Explorer"]
    B --> C["Computer"]

2.4.2 PC-end to the device-end

Device Connection

Connect the speaker or the pickup to the audio output port in the PC and then connect the earphone or the sound box to the first audio input port in the device rear panel.

Login the Web and then enable the corresponding channel real-time monitor.

Please refer to the above interface (Figure 2-71) to enable bidirectional talk.

Listening Operation

At the PC-end, speak via the speaker or the pickup, and then you can get the audio from the earphone or sound box at the device-end. See Figure 2-73.

Figure 2-73

graph LR
    A["Front Panel"] --> B["I/O Interface"]
    B --> C["Computer"]
    D["Internet"] <--> E["Internal Interface"]

2.5 Mouse Operation

Refer to the following sheet for mouse operation instruction.

Table 2-34

Left click mouse	When you have selected one menu item, left click mouse to view menu content.
	Modify checkbox or motion detection status.
	Click combo box to pop up dropdown list
	In input box, you can select input methods. Left click the corresponding button on the panel you can input numeral/English character (small/capitalized). Here← stands for backspace button. _ stands for space button.In English input mode: _stands for input a backspace icon and ← stands for deleting the previous character.
	In numeral input mode: _ stands for clear and ← stands for deleting the previous numeral.
Double left click mouse	Implement special control operation such as double click one item in the file list to playback the video.In multiple-window mode, double left click one channel to view in full-window. Double left click current video again to go back to previous multiple-window mode.
Right click mouse	In real-time monitor mode, pops up shortcut menu.
	Exit current menu without saving the modification.
Press middle button	In numeral input box: Increase or decrease numeral value.
	Switch the items in the check box.
	Page up or page down
Move mouse	Select current control or move control
Drag mouse	Select motion detection zone
	Select privacy mask zone.

2.6 Remote Control

The remote control interface is shown as in Figure 2-74.

Please note remote control is not our standard accessory and it is not included in the accessory bag.

Figure 2-74 1 Zone+ Focus+ Add 2 3 IId= 7 5 Zoom+ Focus- IId= 4 Esc Rec 8 9 Enter 10 11 12 13 Mult Fn 1. 2ABC 3DEF 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO 7PQRS 8TUV 9WXYZ Shift 0- +/- 15

Table 2-35

No.	Name	Function
1	Power button	Press this button to boot up or shut down the device.
2	Address	Press this button to input device serial number, so that you can control the Device.
3	Forward	Multi-step forward speed and normal speed playback.
4	Slow motion	Multi-step slow motion speed or normal playback.
5	Next record	In playback state, press this button to play back the next video.
6	Previous record	In playback state, press this button to play back the previous video.
7	Play/Pause	In normal playback state, press this button to pause playback.In pause state, press this button to resume to normal playback.In live view window interface, press this button to enter video search menu.
8	Reverse/pause	In the reverse playback state, press this button to pause reverse playback.
		In the reverse playback pause state, press this button to resume to playback reversing state.
9	Esc.	Go back to previous menu or cancel current operation (close front interface or control).
10	Record	Start or stop record manually.In record interface, use the direction buttons to select the channel that you want to record.Press this button for at least 1.5 seconds, and the manual record interface will be displayed.
11	Direction keys	Switch between current activated controls by going left or right.In playback state, the keys control the playback progress bar.Aux function (such as operating the PTZ menu).
12	Enter/menu key	Confirms an operation.Go to the OK button.Go to the menu.
13	Multiple-window switch	Switch between multiple-window and one-window.
14	Fn	In single-channel monitoring mode, press this button to display the PTZ control and color setting functions.Switch the PTZ control menu in PTZ control interface.In motion detection interface, press this button with direction keys to complete setup.In text mode, press and hold this button to delete the last character. To use the clearing function: Long press this button for 1.5 seconds.In HDD menu, switch HDD recording time and other information as indicated in the pop-up message.
15	Alphanumeric keys	Input password, numbers.Switch channel.Press Shift to switch the input method.

Note: All the installation and operations here should conform to your local electric safety rules.

3.1 Device Installation Diagrams

Please refer to the following diagrams to install the NVR.

graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["Check there is any visible damage or not"]
    B --> C["Install HDD, DVD-ROM, SATA burner"]
    C --> D["Cable Connection"]
    D --> E["Device Initialization Settings"]
    E --> F["End"]

3.2 Check Unpacked NVR

When you receive the NVR from the forwarding agent, please check whether there is any visible damage. The protective materials used for the package of the NVR can protect most accidental clashes during transportation. Then you can open the box to check the accessories.

Please check the items in accordance with the list. Finally you can remove the protective film of the NVR.

3.3 About Front Panel and Rear Panel

The model number in the stick on the bottom of NVR is very important; please check according to your purchase order.

The label in the rear panel is very important too. Usually we need you to represent the serial number when we provide the service after sales.

3.4 HDD Installation

For the first time installation, make sure whether the HDD has been installed or not. We recommend to use HDD of enterprise level or surveillance level. It is not recommended to use PC HDD.

CAUTION

● Shut off the power before you replace the HDD.
- Use the dedicated SATA HDD for monitoring recommended by the HDD manufacturer.
- You can refer to the Appendix for HDD space information and recommended HDD brand.

3.4.1 NVR41/41-P/41-8P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2/41-4KS2/41-P-4KS2/41-8P-4KS2/21-4KS2/21-P-4KS2/21-8P-4KS2/21-W-4KS2 Series

Close-up of a gray electronic device casing with mounting holes and control buttons (no visible text or symbols)

① Loosen the screws of the bottom of the chassis.

Internal view of an open hard drive with visible circuit board and ports (no readable text or symbols)

② Place the HDD in accordance with the four holes in the bottom.

Close-up of a handheld device with four circular icons and a pen inserted, no visible text or symbols.

③ Turn the device upside down and then secure the screws firmly.

Interior view of a computer case showing internal components and wiring (no visible text or symbols)

④ Connect the HDD cable and power cable to the HDD and the mainboard respectively.

Plain white rectangular object with a small square cutout on top (no text or symbols)

⑤ Put the cover back and then fix the screws of the rear panel. The installation

is complete.

3.4.2 NVR41H/41H-P/41H-8P/21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/41HS-W-S2/41HS-4KS 2/41HS-P-4KS2/41HS-8P-4KS2/21HS-4KS2/21HS-P-4KS2/21HS-8P-4KS2/21HS-W-4KS2 Series

VGA HDMI USB OC12V +5

① Loosen the screws of the upper cover and side panel.

Close-up of hands assembling electronic circuit boards with wires and components (no visible text or symbols)

② Connect the one end of the HDD data cable and the power cable to the mainboard.

Close-up of hands holding a black hard drive with a blue cable, no visible text or symbols

③ Connect the other end of the HDD data cable and the power cable to the HDD.

Hand holding a hard disk drive with visible internal components and wiring (no readable text or symbols)

④ Place the HDD in accordance with the four holes on the bottom of the chassis.

Close-up of a gloved hand holding a screwdriver on a metal tray with perforated holes (no text or symbols visible)

⑤ Turn the device upside down; fix the screws to secure the HDD on the bottom of the chassis.

Black rectangular electronic device with a flat top and a flat base (no visible text or symbols)

⑥ Put the cover in accordance with the clip and then fix the screws on the rear panel and side panel.

3.4.3 NVR42/42N/42-P/42-8P/42-16P/42-4K/42-8P-4K/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2/42-4KS2/42-P-4KS2/42-8P-4KS2/42-16P-4KS2/5224-24P-4KS2/22-4KS2/22-P-4KS2/22-8P-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E Series

Black electronic device with a red cable and label, no visible text or symbols on the body

① Loosen the screws of the rear panel and side panel.

Interior view of a computer setup with visible circuit board, RAM slots, and internal components (no text or symbols)

② Place the HDD in accordance with the four holes in the bottom.

Exterior view of a white electronic device casing with four mounting holes and ventilation grilles (no visible text or symbols)

③ Turn the device upside down and then secure the screws firmly. It is to fix the HDD on the chassis.

Interior view of an open computer case showing internal components like CPU, memory, and wiring (no visible text or labels)

Black rectangular electronic device with a red cable, no visible text or symbols on its body

④Connect the HDD cable and power cable.
⑤Put the cover in accordance with the clip and then fix the screws on the rear panel and side panel.

3.4.4 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P/54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/44-4KS2/44-16P-4KS2/5424-24P-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2E Series

Back view of a black server or network device with ports and a cable, no visible text or symbols

① Use the screwdriver to loose the screws of the rear panel and then remove the front cover.

Interior view of a computer drive bay showing internal components like CPU socket, RAM slots, and cable routing (no visible text or labels)

② Put the HDD to the HDD bracket in the chassis and then line up the four screws to the four holes in the HDD. Use the screwdriver to fix the screws firmly to secure HDD on the HDD bracket

Interior view of a computer rack with exposed circuit board and cable, no visible text or symbols

③ Connect to the HDD data cable to the main board and the HDD port respectively. Loosen the power cable of the chassis and connect another end of the power cable to the HDD port.

Exterior view of a black electronic device with ventilation grilles (no text or symbols visible)

④ After connect the cable, put the front cover back to the device and then fix screws of the rear panel.

3.4.5 NVR48/48-16P/58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2/48-4KS2/48-16P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2E Series

Front view of a black server rack with ports and a cable inserted (no visible text or labels)

① Use the screwdriver to loose the screws of the rear panel and then remove the front cover.

Black rectangular electronic device with a top panel and ventilation grille (no visible text or symbols)

② Put the HDD to the HDD bracket in the chassis and then line up the four screws to the four holes in the HDD. Use the screwdriver to fix the screws firmly to secure HDD on the HDD bracket

Interior view of a server rack with exposed circuit board and cable, no visible text or symbols

③ Connect to the HDD data cable to the main board and the HDD port respectively. Loosen the power cable of the chassis and connect another end of the power cable to the HDD port.

Black rectangular electronic device with a ventilation grille and indicator lights (no visible text or symbols)

④ After connect the cable, put the front cover back to the device and then fix screws of the rear panel.

3.4.6 NVR42V-8P Series

Close-up of a metallic electronic device with circular perforations and a small orange component on the side (no visible text or symbols)

① Use 4 screws to secure the HDD

Close-up of a hand inserting a plastic into a hard disk drive into a black CPU socket (no visible text or symbols)

② Put the HDD to the HDD box at the front.

Hand inserting a black drive into a black server rack on a white surface, with a dot-patterned wall in the background (no text or symbols visible)

③ Pull the HDD knob up when you put the HDD into the box in case the knob buckle may strike the front panel.

Hand inserting a black plastic into a black box on a white surface, with a dotted wall and window in the background (no text or symbols visible)

④ Put the knob back after you insert the HDD to the SATA board.

3.5 CD-ROM Installation

Please follow the steps listed below.

Interior view of a computer drive bay with exposed circuit board and wiring, no visible text or symbols

① Open top cover and then remove the HDD bracket

Metal structural beam with vertical supports and a diagonal rod, no visible text or symbols

③ Fix the CD-ROM bracket at the HDD bracket.

Two metallic metal panels with internal slots and mounting holes, shown from different angles (no text or symbols visible)

② Take off the bottom of the HDD bracket and CD-ROM bracket.

Two metallic structural panels with internal channels and mounting holes, shown from different angles (no text or symbols visible)

④ Install a pair of the CD-ROM bracket. Please make sure the reverse side is secure too.

Exterior view of a metallic electronic device with mounting brackets and mounting holes (no text or symbols visible)

⑤ Install SATA burner. Line up the SATA burner to the hole positions.

Metallic rectangular block mounted on a metal frame with a vertical rod inserted (no visible text or symbols)

⑥ User screwdriver to fix the screws.

Interior view of an electronic equipment cabinet showing CPU socket, wiring, and power connectors (no visible text or labels)

⑦ Put the bracket back. Please adjust the CD-ROM to the proper position so that the button of the front panel is directly facing the pop-up button of the CD-ROM.

Interior view of a computer drive bay showing internal components and cable routing (no visible text or symbols)

⑧ Connect the SATA cable and power wire.

Exterior view of a black server rack with ventilation grilles (no text or symbols visible)

⑨ Secure the HDD bracket and put the top cover back.

3.6 Connection Sample

3.6.1 NVR41/41-P/41-8P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2/41-4KS2/41-P-4KS2/41-8P-4KS2/21-4KS2/21-P-4KS2/21-8P-4KS2 Series

Please refer to Figure 3-1 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-1

Bidirectional Talk Output VGA Output Bidirectional Talk Input USB Port HDMI Network Switch Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard

3.6.2 NVR41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series

Please refer to Figure 3-2 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-2

graph TD
    A["Bidirectional Talk Output"] --> B["USB Port"]
    C["HDMI"] --> D["Device 1"]
    E["VGA Output"] --> F["Device 2"]
    G["Bidirectional Talk Input"] --> H["Network Switch"]
    I["Network User"] --> J["Computer"]
    K["Network User"] --> L["Computer"]
    M["Network User"] --> N["Computer"]
    O["Network Keyboard"] --> P["Computer"]

3.6.3 NVR41HS-W-S2/21-W-4KS2/21HS-W-4KS2 Series

Please refer to Figure 3-3 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-3

USB Port HDMI Output VGA Output Power Socket Switch Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard Network Camera Network Camera Network Camera Network Camera

3.6.4 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/41HS-4KS2/41HS-P-4KS2/41HS-8P-4KS2/21HS-4KS2/21HS-P-4KS2/21HS-8P-4KS2 Series

Please refer to Figure 3-4 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-4

IPC VGA Output Bidirectional Talk Output HDMI Output PoE PORTB VGA MIC OUT MIC IN NVIDIA USB Port Power Socket Network Switch Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard

3.6.5 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2/22-4KS2/22-P-4KS2/22-8P-4KS2 Series

Please refer to Figure 3-5 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-5

IPC VGA Output Bidirectional Talk Output HDMI Output ON OFF P&E PORTS 1 3 5 7 DC IN 2 4 6 8 VGA MIC USB Port Power Socket Network Switch Bidirectional Talk Input Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard

3.6.6 NVR42N Series

Please refer to Figure 3-6 for connection sample.

Figure 3-6

VGA Output Bidirectional Talk Output RS232 Port Power on/off Button USB Port Power Socket GND Bidirectional Talk Input HDMI Output Network Switch Network User Network User Network User Network keyboard

3.6.7 NVR42/42-P/42-8P/42-16P/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/5224-24P-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E Series

Please refer to Figure 3-7 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-7

graph TD
    A["Network User"] --> B["Network Switch"]
    C["Network Keyboard"] --> B
    D["IPC"] --> E["VGIA"]
    F["Bidirectional Talk Output"] --> E
    G["Alarm Output"] --> H["RS211"]
    I["RS485 PTZ Control"] --> H
    J["VGA Output"] --> K["Bidirectional Talk Input"]
    L["HDMI Output"] --> K
    M["Alarm Input"] --> K
    B --> N["Computer"]
    B --> O["Computer"]
    B --> P["Computer"]
    B --> Q["Computer"]
    B --> R["Computer"]

3.6.8 NVR42-8P-4K/42-4KS2/42-P-4KS2/42-8P-4KS2/42-16P-4KS2 Series

Please refer to Figure 3-8 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-8

Power Socket Power on-off Button IPC Network Switch USB Port HDMI Output VGA Output Audio Talk Input RS232 Port VGA Audio Talk Input Alarm Input Alarm Output RS485 PTZ

3.6.9 NVR54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2/5424-24P-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2E /5816P-4KS2E Series

Please refer to Figure 3-8 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-9

Power on-off Button Power Socket Audio Talk Input VGA Output RS232 Port USB Port Network Switch HDMI Output Audio Talk Input Network User Network User Network User Network Keyboard

3.6.10 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P/44-4KS2/44-16P-4KS2 Series

Please refer to Figure 3-10 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-10

graph TD
    A["Back panel with network ports"] --> B["Bidirectional Talk Output"]
    A --> C["VGA Output"]
    A --> D["Alarm Input"]
    A --> E["Alarm Output"]
    A --> F["RS485 PTZ"]
    A --> G["RS232 Port"]
    A --> H["USB Port"]
    A --> I["eSATA Port"]
    A --> J["IPC"]
    A --> K["Bidirectional Talk Input"]
    K --> L["Network Switch"]
    K --> M["Video Output"]
    K --> N["HDMI Output"]
    A --> O["Network User"]
    A --> P["Network User"]
    A --> Q["Network User"]
    A --> R["Network Keyboard"]

3.6.11 NVR48/48-16P/48-4KS2/48-16P-4KS2 Series

Please refer to Figure 3-11 for connection sample.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 3-11

graph TD
    A["Network User"] --> B["Network Keyboard"]
    C["Network User"] --> D["Network Keyboard"]
    E["Network Switch"] --> F["Video Output"]
    G["IPC"] --> H["Bidirectional Talk Input"]
    I["RS232 Port"] --> J["USB Port"]
    K["RS485 PTZ"] --> L["eSATA Port"]
    M["Bidirectional Talk Output"] --> N["VGA Output"]
    O["Alarm Input"] --> P["RS232 Port"]
    Q["Alarm Output"] --> R["RS485 PTZ"]

3.6.12 NVR42V-8P Series

Please refer to Figure 3-12 for connection sample.

Figure 3-12

Power Socket PoE Port VGA Output 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 PoE PORTS GND Public end 1 2 ↓ C HD MIC OUT USB Port Bidirectional Talk Input Bidirectional Talk Output HDMI Output Network Switch USB Port Alarm Input Alarm Output Online User Online User Online User Network Keyboard Online User

Slight difference may be found on the user interface. The following figures for reference only.

4.1 Getting Started

This chapter introduces device initial settings such as boot up, device initialization, reset password, and quick settings.

4.1.1 Boot up

• For device security, connect the NVR to the power adapter first and then connect the device to the power socket.
• The rated input voltage matches the device power button. Make sure the power wire connection is OK. Then click the power button.
  ● Always use the stable current, if necessary UPS is a best alternative measure.

Step 1 Connect the device to the monitor and then connect a mouse.

Step 2 Connect power cable.

Step 3 Click the power button at the front or rear panel and then boot up the device. After device booted up, the system is in multiple-channel display mode by default.

4.1.2 Device Initialization

If it is your first time to use the device, set a login password of admin (system default user). You can select to use unlock pattern to login or not at your own choosing.

For your device safety, keep your login password of admin well after the initialization steps, and change the password regularly.

Step 1 Boot up NVR.

The Device Initialization interface is displayed. See Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1

Device Initialization System Zone (UTC+08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong ... System Time 2019 -01 -21 11 :22 :10 Next

Step 2 Set system time zone according to the actual environment. Refer to Table 4-4 in "4.1.4.1.2 Date and Time" for detailed information.

Click to shut down the device. It is suitable for the system integrator or the user to shut down directly after setting the time zone.

Step 3 Click Next.

The Device Initialization interface is displayed. See Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2

Device Initialization 1. Enter Password → 2. Unlock Pattern → 3. Password Protection User admin Password Conf... Use a password that has 8 to 32 characters, it can be a combination of letter(s), number(s) and symbol(s) with at least two kinds of them.(please do not use special symbols like ' "; &) Pro... Next

Step 4 Set login password of admin. See Table 4-1.

Table 4-1

Parameter	Description
User	By default, the user isadmin.
Password	In thePasswordbox, enter the password for admin.The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding" "", "", ";", ":" and "&").
Confirm Password
Prompt Question	In thePrompt Questionbox, enter the information that can remind you of the password.On the login interface, click the prompt will display to help you reset the password.

For your device own safety, create a strong password of your own choosing. We also recommend you change your password periodically especially in the high security system. Step 5 Click Next.

The Unlock Pattern interface is displayed. See Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3

Device Initialization 1. Enter Password → 2. Unlock Pattern → 3. Password Protection Please draw the unlock pattern. Back Skip

Step 6 Set unlock pattern.

After set unlock pattern, the Password Protection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-4.

● The pattern that you want to set must cross at least four grids.
- If you do not want to configure the unlock pattern, click Skip.
- Once you have configured the unlock pattern, the system will require the unlock pattern as the default login method. If you skip this setting, enter the password for login.

Figure 4-4

Device Initialization 1. Enter Password → 2. Unlock Pattern → 3. Password Protection Email Address To reset password, please input properly or Security Questions update in time Question 1 What is your favorite children's book? Answer Question 2 What was the first name of your first boss? Answer Question 3 What is the name of your favorite fruit? Answer Save

Step 7 Set security questions. See Table 4-2.

• After configuration, if you forgot the password for admin user, you can reset the password through the reserved email address or security questions. For details about resetting the password, see "4.1.3 Reset Password".
• If you do not want to configure the settings, disable the email address and security questions functions on the interface.

Table 4-2

Password Protection Mode	Description
Email Address	Enter the reserved email address.In the Email Address box, enter an email address for password reset. If you forget the password, enter the security code that you will get from this reserved email address to reset the password of admin.Refer to " 4.15.1.2 Modify Password" for detailed information.
Security Questions	Configure the security questions and answers.If you forget the password, enter the answers to the questions can allow you reset the password. Refer to " 4.15.3 Reset Password " for detailed information.

Step 8 Click Save to complete the device initialization setup.

Step 9 Device goes to startup wizard interface. Refer to "4.1.4 Quick Settings" for detailed information.

4.1.3 Reset Password

You can reset the password by the following methods when you forgot the password for admin account.

• If the password reset function is enabled, you can use mobile phone to scan the QR code to reset the password. For details, see "4.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface."
• If the password reset function is disabled, there are two situations:

◇ If you configured security questions, you can reset the password by the security questions.
If you did not configure the security questions, you can only use the reset button on the mainboard to restore the Device to factory default.

Reset button is for some series product only.

4.1.3.1 Enabling Password Reset Function

After enabling password reset function, you can scan QR code on the local menu to reset password.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > Account > Reset Password.

The Reset Password interface is displayed. See Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5

Reset Password Enable Email Address Security Question Please set a security question so that you can find the password of admin again. Question 1 What is your favorite children' s book? Answer Question 2 What was the first name of your first boss? Answer Question 3 What is the name of your favorite fruit? Answer Apply Back

Step 2 Check the box to enable reset function.

This function is enabled by default.

Step 3 Click Apply to set settings.

If the password reset function is disabled, you can follow the ways listed below to reset password.

• Device supports Reset button on the main board: You can answer the security question on the local menu or click the Reset button on the main board to reset password. Refer to "4.1.3.3 Reset Button" for detailed information.
• Device does not support Reset button on the main board: You can only answer the security question on the local menu to reset password. (Make sure you have set security questions).

4.1.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface

Step 1 Enter the SYSTEM LOGIN interface.

• If you have configured unlock pattern, the unlock pattern login interface is displayed. See Figure 4-6. Click Forgot Pattern, the password login interface is displayed. See Figure 4-7.

- If you did not configure unlock pattern, the System Login interface is displayed. See Figure 4-7.

To login from other user account, on the unlock pattern login interface, click Switch User, or on the password login interface, in the Switch User list, select other user to login.

Figure 4-6

SYSTEM LOGIN admin Forgot Pattern Switch User

Figure 4-7

SYSTEM LOGIN User Name admin Password OK Cancel

Step 2 Click

• If you have set the reserved email address, the Prompt interface is displayed. See Figure 4-8.
• If you did not set the reserved email address, the email entering interface is displayed. See Figure 4-9.
• Enter the email address, and then click Next, the Prompt message interface is displayed. See Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8

Reset Password In order to provide a secure password reset environment, we need to collect your e-mail address, device MAC address, device SN, etc. All collected info is used only for the purposes of verifying device validity and sending a security code to you. Do you agree and want to continue the operation? OK Cancel

Figure 4-9

Reset Password Reset Type QR Code Email Address To reset password, please input properly or update in time Next Cancel

Step 3 Click Next.

The Reset Password interface is displayed. See Figure 4-10.

After clicking Next, the system will collect your information for password reset, purpose and the information includes but not limited to email address, MAC address, and device serial number. Read the prompt carefully before clicking Next.

Figure 4-10

Reset Password Reset Type QR Code SN: 000000000000000000 Scan the QR code on the actual interface Note(For admin only): Option 1. Please download DMSS and then from More-Reset Device Password, scan the left QR code. Option 2. Please use an APP to scan the left QR code to get encryption strings. And then send the strings to [e-mail]. The security code will be delivered to 2***@qq.com. Security code Next Cancel

Step 4 Reset the password.

- QR code

Follow the onscreen instructions to get the security code in your reserved email address. In the Security code box, enter the security code.

- You can get the security code twice by scanning the same QR code. If you need to get the security code once again, refresh the interface.

- Use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24 hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.

- Security questions

On the Reset password interface as shown in Figure 4-11, in the Reset Type list, select Security Questions, the Security Questions interface is displayed.

If you did not configure the security questions before, in the Reset Type list, there is no Security Questions.

Figure 4-11

Reset Password Reset Type Security Questions Question 1 What is your favorite children's book? Answer Question 2 What was the first name of your first boss? Answer Question 3 What is the name of your favorite fruit? Answer Next Cancel

Step 5 Click Next.

The Reset Password interface is displayed. See Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12

Reset Password Reset password of (admin) New Password Use a password that has 8 to 32 characters, it can be a combination of letter(s), number(s) and symbol(s) with at least two kinds of them.(please do not use special symbols like ' "; & ) Confirm Password Save Cancel

Step 6 In the New Password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Confirm Password box.

Step 7 Click Save. The password resetting is complete.

A pop-up message is displayed asking if you want to sync the password with the remote devices. See Figure 4-13.

Figure 4-13

Reset the password Reset password of (admin) New Password Use a password that has 8 to 32 Confirm Passv Message Do you want to sync Password with the remote device connecting via the default protocol? OK Cancel Save Cancel

4.1.3.3 Reset Button

You can always use the reset button on the mainboard to reset the Device to the factory default settings.

Reset button is for some series products only.

Step 1 Disconnect the Device from power source, and then remove the cover panel. For details about removing the cover panel, see "3.4 HDD Installation."

Step 2 Find the reset button on the mainboard, and then connect the Device to the power source again.

Step 3 Press and hold the reset button for 5 seconds to 10 seconds. See Figure 4-14 for the location of the reset button.

Figure 4-14

Close-up of a printed circuit board with various electronic components and connectors (no readable text or symbols)

Step 4 Reboot the Device.

After the Device is rebooted, the settings have been restored to the factory default. You can start resetting the password.

4.1.4 Quick Settings

After you successfully initialized the device, it goes to startup wizard. Here you can quickly configure your device. Click Next, device goes to General interface.

The startup wizard interface only displays after you first login the device and have set the admin password. See Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15

Startup Wizard Welcome to use startup wizard. This startup wizard will help you set parameters. Click Next to continue. ✓ Auto-check for updates Automatically notify me when updates are available. The system checks for updates daily. To inform you of the latest firmware upgrades for your device, we need to collect device info such as IP address, device name, firmware version, device SN, etc. All collected info is used only for the purposes of verifying device validity and pushing upgrade notifications.

• If you select the Auto-check for updates check box, the system will notify you automatically when updates are available.
• After the auto-check function is enabled, to notify you to update timely, the system will collect the information such as IP address, device name, firmware version, and device serial number. The collected information is only used to verify the legality of the Device and push upgrade notices.
• If you cancel the Auto-check for updates check box, the system will not perform automatic checks.

4.1.4.1 General

You can set NVR basic information such as system date, holiday and etc. You can also configure general settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM > General.

4.1.4.1.1 General

You can set device basic information such as device name, serial number.

Step 1 Click Next.

The General interface is displayed. See Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16

General Device Name NVR Device No. 8 Language ENGLISH Video Standard PAL Sync to Remote Device (Include language,... Instant Replay(Min.) 5 Auto Logout(Min.) 10 Monitor Channel(s) when logout IPC Time Sync IPC Time Sync Period (hour) 24 Navigation Bar Mouse Sensitivity - Slow + Fast Back Next

Step 2 Set parameters. See Table 4-3.

Table 4-3

Parameter	Description
Device Name	In the Device Name box, enter the Device name.
Device No.	In the Device No. box, enter a number for the Device.
Language	In the Language list, select a language for the Device system.
Video Standard	In the Video Standard list, select PAL or NTSC according to your actual situation.
Sync to Remote Device	Enable this function; the NVR can synchronize information with the remote device such as Language, video standard, time zone.
Instant Play (Min.)	In the Instant Play box, enter the time length for playing back the recorded video. The value ranges from 5 to 60.On the live view control bar, click the instant playback button to play back the recorded video within the configured time.
Auto Logout (Min.)	In the Auto Logout box, enter the standby time for the Device. The Device automatically logs out when it is not working for the configured time period. You need to login the Device again.The value ranges from 0 to 60. 0 indicates there is not standby time for the Device.Click Monitor Channel(s) when logout. You can select the channels that you want to continue monitoring when you logged out.
IPC Time Sync	Syncs the Device time with IP camera.
IPC Time Sync Period (hour)	In the IPC Time Sync Period box, enter the interval for time sync.
Auto logout	You can set auto logout interval once login user remains inactive for a specified time. Value ranges from 0 to 60 minutes.
Navigation Bar	Enable the navigation bar. When you click on the live view screen, the navigation bar is displayed.
Mouse Sensitivity	Adjust the speed of double-click by moving the slider.The bigger the value is, the faster the speed is.

Step 3 Click Next button to save settings.

4.1.4.1.2 Date and Time

You can set device time. You can enable NTP (Network Time Protocol) function so that the device can sync time with the NTP server.

You can also configure date and time settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM > GENERAL > Date&Time.

Step 1 Click Date & Tim tab. See Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17

Date&Time System Time 2000 -01 -01 00 :10 :20 System Zone (UTC+08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, U... Date Format YYYY MM DD Date Separator - Time Format 24-HOUR DST Date Week Start Time 2000 -01 -01 00 :00 End Time 2000 -01 -01 00 :00 NTP Server time.windows.com Manual Update Port 123 Interval(Min.) 60 Back Next

Step 2 Configure the settings for date and time parameters. See Table 4-4.

Table 4-4

Parameter	Description
System Time	In the System Time box, enter time for the system.Click the time zone list, you can select a time zone for the system, and the time in adjust automatically.Do not change the system time randomly; otherwise the recorded video cannot be searched. It is recommended to avoid the recording period or stop recording first before you change the system time.
System Zone	In the System Zone list, select a time zone for the system.
Date Format	In the Date Format list, select a date format for the system.
Date Separator	In the Date Separator list, select a separator style for the date.
Time Format	In the Time Format list, select 12-HOUR or 24-HOUR for the time display style.
DST	Enable the Daylight Saving Time function. Click Week or click Date.
Start Time	Configure the start time and end time for the DST.
End Time
NTP	Enable the NTP function to sync the Device time with the NTP server.
Server	In the Server box, enter the IP address or domain name of the corresponding NTP server.Click Manual Update, the Device starts syncing with the server immediately.
Port	The system supports TCP protocol only and the default setting is 123.
Interval (Min.)	In the Interval box, enter the amount of time that you want the Device to sync time with the NTP server. The value ranges from 0 to 65535.

Step 3 Click Next button to save settings.

4.1.4.1.3 Holiday

Here you can add, edit, delete holiday. After you successfully set holiday information, you can view holiday item on the record and snapshot period.

You can also configure holiday settings by selecting Main Menu > SYSTEM > GENERAL > Holiday.

Step 1 Click Next.

The Holiday interface is displayed. See Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18

Holiday 0 Status Name Date Duration Operation Add Holidays Back Next

Step 2 Click Add Holidays button, the Add Holidays interface is displayed. See Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19

Add Holidays Holiday Name Repeat Mode Once Always Holiday Range Date Week Start Time 2000 - 01 - 01 End Time 2000 - 01 - 01 Add More Add Cancel

Step 3 Set holiday name, repeat mode and holiday mode.

Click Add more to add new holiday information.

Step 4 Click Add button, you can add current holiday to the list.

• Click the dropdown list of the state; you can enable/disable holiday date.
• Click to change the holiday information. Click to delete current date.

Step 5 Click Next button to save settings.

4.1.4.2 Basic Network Settings

You can set device IP address, DNS (Domain Name System) information. You can also configure basic network settings by selecting Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP.

Preparation

Make sure the device has properly connected to the network.

Step 1 Click Next.

The TCP/IP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-20.

Different series products have different Ethernet adapter amount and type. Refer to the actual product.

Figure 4-20

TCP/IP Ethernet Card IP Address Net Mode NIC Member Edit Unbind Ethernet Port1 IP 1706 Single NIC 1 Ethernet Port2 IP 1706 Single NIC 2 IP Address:172.12.70.67 Default Gateway:173.12.81 MTU:1500 MAC Address: IP 198.10x3 Subnet Mask:255.255.0.0 Mode:STATIC IP Version IPv4 Preferred DNS 8 . 8 . 8 . 8 Alternate DNS 8 . 8 . 4 . 4 Default Card Ethernet Port1 Test Back Next

Step 2 Click

The Edit interface is displayed. See Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21

Edit Ethernet Card Ethernet Port1 Net Mode Single NIC Fault-ToleranceLoad Balance NIC Member Ethernet... IP Version IPv4 DHCP MAC Address 366728.00.00 IP Address Test Subnet Mask Default Gateway MTU 5900 OK Cancel

Step 3 Set parameters. See Table 4-5.

Step 4 Click OK to NIC settings.
Device goes back to TCP/IP interface.
Table 4-5
Step 5 Set network parameters. See Table 4-6.

Parameter	Description
Net Mode	Multi-address: Two Ethernet ports work separately through either of which you can request the Device to provide the services such as HTTP and RTSP. You need to configure a default Ethernet port (usually the Ethernet port 1 by default) to request the services from the device end such as DHCP, Email and FTP. If one of the two Ethernet ports is disconnected as detected by networking testing, the system network status is regarded as offline.Fault Tolerance: Two Ethernet ports share one IP address. Normally only one Ethernet port is working and when this port fails, the other port will start working automatically to ensure the network connection.When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN.Load Balance: Two network cards share one IP address and they are working at the same time to share the network load averagely. If one of them fails, the other can continue working normally.When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN.The Device with single Ethernet port does not support this function.
Default Ethernet Port	In the Ethernet Card list, select an Ethernet port as a default port.This setting is available only when the Multi-address is selected in the Net Mode list.
IP Version	In the IP Version list, you can select IPv4 or IPv6. Both versions are supported for access.
MAC Address	Displays the MAC address of the Device.
DHCP	Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway are not available for configuration once DHCP is enabled.If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will display in the IP Address box, Subnet Mask box and Default Gateway box. If not, all values show 0.0.0.0.If you want manually configure the IP information, disable the DHCP function first.If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DHCP are not available for configuration.
IP Address	Enter the IP address and configure the corresponding subnet mask and default gateway.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway	IP address and default gateway must be in the same network segment.
DNS DHCP	Enable the DHCP function to get the DNS address from router.
Preferred DNS	In the Preferred DNS box, enter the IP address of DNS.
Alternate DNS	In the Alternate DNS box, enter the IP address of alternate DNS.
MTU	In the MTU box, enter a value for network card. The value ranges from 1280 byte through 1500 byte. The default is 1500.
Test	Click Test to test if the entered IP address and gateway are interworking.

Table 4-6

Parameter	Description
IP Version	There are two options: IPv4 and IPv6. Right now, system supports these two IP address format and you can access via them.
Preferred DNS server	DNS server IP address.
Alternate DNS server	DNS server alternate address.
MAC Address	Displays the MAC address of the Device.
DHCP	Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway are not available for configuration once DHCP is enabled.If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will display in theIPAddressbox,Subnet Maskbox andDefault Gatewaybox. If not, all values show 0.0.0.0.If you want manually configure the IP information, disable the DHCP function first.If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DHCP are not available for configuration.
LAN download	System can process the downloaded data first if you enable this function. The download speed is 1.5X or 2.0X of the normal speed.For IPv6 version, the IP address, default gateway, preferred DNS; alternate DNS is 128-digit. Fill in all items here.This function is for some series product only.

Step 6 Click Next to complete the settings.

4.1.4.3 P2P

Scan the QR code, download the App to the cell phone, you can use the smart phone to add the device.

• Scan the QR code on the actual interface to download the cell phone app. Register an account and then use.
• Go to the www.easy4ip.com to register an account and use the SN to add a device. Refer to the P2P operation manual for detailed information.

Before use the P2P function, make sure the NVR has connected to the WAN.

Step 1 Click Next button.

The P2P interface is displayed. See Figure 4-22.

Select Main Menu > Network > P2P, you can go to P2P interface too.

Figure 4-22

P2P Enable To assist you in remotely managing your device, the P2P will be enabled. After enabling P2P and connecting to Internet, we need to collect IP address, MAC address, device name, device SN, etc. All collected info is used only for the purpose of remote access. If you don't agree to enable P2P function, please deselect the check box. Status Off-line Cell Phone Client Scan the QR code on the actual interface Device SN Scan the QR code on the actual interface Scan QR to Download 000000000000000000 Back Next

Step 2 Check the box to enable P2P function.

After the P2P function is enabled and connected to the Internet, the system will collects your information for remote access, and the information includes but not limited to email address, MAC address, and device serial number.

Step 3 Click Next button to complete setup.

The status is online if the P2P registration is successful.

Client Operation

Step 1 Use your cell phone to scan the QR code under Cell Phone Client to download the application.

Step 2 On your cell phone, open the application, and then tap

Step 3 The menu is displayed. You can start adding the device.

1) Tap Device Manager.

The Device Manager interface is displayed. See Figure 4-23.

Figure 4-23

Device Manager Search Device Create device card

2) Tap on the top right corner.

The interface requiring device initialization is displayed. A pop-up message reminding you to make sure the Device is initialized is displayed.

3) Tap OK.

If the Device has not been initialized, Tap Device Initialization to perform initializing by following the onscreen instructions.
◇ If the Device has been initialized, you can start adding it directly.

4) Tap Add Device.

The Add Device interface is displayed. See Figure 4-24.

You can add wireless device or wired device. The Manual takes adding wired device as an example.

Figure 4-24

P2P Register Mode: P2P Name: SN: Username: admin Password: Live Preview: Extra > Playback: Extra > Start Live Preview

5) Tap P2P.

The P2P interface is displayed. See Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25

P2P Register Mode: P2P Name: SN: Username: admin Password: Live Preview: Extra > Playback: Extra > Start Live Preview

6) Enter a name for the NVR, the username and password, scan the QR code under Device SN.
7) Tap Start Live Preview.

The Device is added and displayed on the live view interface of the cell phone. See Figure 4-26.

Live Preview XUR7-4KL-CAM 1 XUR7-4KL-CAM 2 2017-18-21 09:00:18 CAM 1 CAM 2 XUR7-4KL-CAM 3 2017-18-21 09:00:18 CAM 3 CAM 4 1/2

Figure 4-26

4.1.4.4 Registration

If you do not select Smart add function during the initialization process, go to the remote Device interface to register a remote device.

After adding remote device, the device can receive, store, and manage the video streams of the remote device. You can view, browse, play back and manage several remote devices at the same time.

Step 1 On the P2P interface, click Next button.

The REGISTRATION interface is displayed. See Figure 4-27.

There are two ways to go to Registration interface.

• Select Main Menu > CAMERA > REGISTRATION > Camera Registration, you can go to the Camera Registration interface.
• On the preview interface, right click mouse and then select Camera Registration.

Figure 4-27

REGISTRATION Show Filter None Uninitialized IP Address Search 0 Edit Preview Status IP Address Manufac Device Search Initialize Modify IP Add Manual Add Added Device Link Info Channel Edit Delete Status IP Address Port Device N Delete H.265 Auto Switch Import Export Residue bandwidth/T... 320.00Mbps/320.00Mbps Back Next

Step 2 Register remote device.

- Search and then add

1) Click Device Search. System displays searched devices at the upper pane.
2) Double-click a remote device, or select a remote device and then click Add to register it to the Added Device list. See Figure 4-28. Refer to
3) Table 4-7 to set parameters.

The search results do not display the remote camera that has registered to the system

Figure 4-28

REGISTRATION Show Filter Null Uninitialized IP Address Search 73 Edit Preview Status IP Address Manuf 1 Onvif 2 Private 3 Private Device Search Initialize Modify IP Add Manual Add Added Device Link Info Channel Edit Delete Status IP Address Port Device N D1 80 iDS-2VP D2 37810 DSS Win Delete H.265 Auto Switch Import Export Residue bandwidth/T... 320.00Mbps/320.00Mbps Back Next

Table 4-7

Parameter	Description
Uninitialized	Enable theUninitializedfunction, the uninitialized devices out of the searched devices are displayed in the searched device list.
Initialize	Select the uninitialized device from the uninitialized device list, and the clickInitializeto start initializing device.
Show Filter	In theShow Filterlist, select the remote device type that you want to display in the searched device list.None: Display all types of devices.IPC: Display the front-end devices.DVR: Display all storage devices such as NVR, DVR and HCVR.OTHER: Display the devices that do not belong to IPC or DVRType.
Searched Device List	Displays the searched devices. You can view the device information such as status, IP address.
Device Search	ClickDevice Search, the searched devices display in the searched device list.To adjust the display sequence, in the title line, you can click the IP address, Manufacturer, Type, MAC Address, Port, or Device Name text. For example, click the IP address text, the sequence iconIPAdrsplayed.""* is displayed next to the added device.
Add	In the Searched Device List area, select the device that you want to add.
Manual Add	Add the device by manually configuring settings such as IP address, channel selection.
Added Device List	Displays the added devices. You can edit and delete the device, and view the device information.
Delete	Select the check box of the added device, and then click Delete to delete the added device.
Import	Select the searched devices and then click Import to import the devices in batches.
Export	Select the added devices and then click Export. The exported devices information is saved into the USB storage device.

- Manual Add

1) Click Manual Add.

The Manual Add interface is displayed. See Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29

Manual Add Channel D7 Manufacturer Private IP Address 192.168.0.0 TCP Port 37777 Username adults Password Connect Channel No. 1 Setting Remote Channel No. D1 Decode Buffer Default OK Cancel

2) Configure parameters. See Table 4-8.

3) Click OK.
The remote device information is displayed on the Added Device list.
Table 4-8

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want use on the Device to connect the remote device.
Manufacturer	In the Manufacturer list, select the manufacturer of the remote device.
IP Address	In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of remote device.The default is 192.168.0.0 which the system cannot connect to.
RTSP Port	The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
HTTP Port	The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.
User Name	Enter the user name of the remote device.
Password	Enter the password of the user for the remote device.
Remote Channel	Enter the remote channel number of the remote device that you want to add.
Decoder Buffer	In the Decoder Buffer list, select Default, Realtime, or Fluent.
Protocol Type	If the remote device is added through private protocol, the default type is TCP.If the remote device is added through Onvif protocol, the system supports Auto, TCP, UDP, or MULTICAST.If the remote device is added through other manufacturers, the system supports TCP and UDP.
Encrypt	If the remote device is added through Onvif protocol, selecting the Encrypt check box will provide encryption protection to the data being transmitted.To use this function, the HTTPS function should be enabled for the remote IP camera.

Step 4 Click Next to complete the remote device registration.

to delete remote device.

Once the multiple-sensor device has registered to the device system displays the channel status on the Link info. See Figure 4-30. It shows one remote device has occupied two channels: D1, D3.

Figure 4-30

REGISTRATION Show Filter Null Uninitialized IP Address Search 73 Edit Preview Status IP Address Manuf 1 Onvif 2 LIVE Private 3 LIVE Private Device Search Initialize Modify IP Add Manual Add Added Device Link Info No. IP Address Channel 1 D1, D3 Delete H.265 Auto Switch Import Export Residue bandwidth/T... 320.00Mbps/320.00Mbps Back Next

4.1.4.5 RAID Manager

RAID (redundant array of independent disks) is a data storage virtualization technology that combines multiple physical HDD components into a single logical unit for the purposes of data redundancy, performance improvement, or both.

RAID function is for some series product only. Slight difference may be found on the user interface.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > RAID > RAID.

The RAID interface is displayed. See Figure 4-31.

Figure 4-31

RAID Type Raid5 Working Mode Self-adaptive 0 Name Capacity Type Disk members Delete Create RAID Create Manually Back Next

Step 2 You can click Create RAID or Create Manually, and all the disks involved will be formatted.

- Click Create RAID, the system will create RAID automatically.

If there is no existing RAID and no hot spare disk, the system will create RAID5 and a hot spare disk automatically.

If there is no existing RAID, but existing hot spare disk, the system will only create RAID5 and use the existing hot spare disk automatically.

If there is existing RAID and existing hot spare disk, the system will delete the original RAID and create RAID5 with all the disks and use the existing hot spare disk automatically.

- Click Create Manually.

1) Select RAID type and disks as system instructed.
2) Click Create Manually, and then the format disk notice is displayed.
3) Click OK.

Step 3 After creating RAID, the disks need to sync with each other to finish the process. For RAID5 and RAID6, you can select different working mode.

- Self-Adaptive: Automatically adjust the RAID sync speed according to the business status.

When there is no business running, sync is performed at a high speed.
When there is business running, sync is performed at a low speed.

• Sync First: Resource priority is assigned to RAID sync.
  • Business First: Resource priority is assigned to business operations.
  • Balance: Resource is evenly distributed to RAID sync and business operations.

4.1.4.6 Schedule

After set record schedule and snapshot schedule, the device can automatically record video and snapshot image at the specified time. Select Main menu > STORAGE > SCHEDULE, you can go to the SCHEDULE interface.

4.1.4.6.1 Recording Schedule

After set schedule record, device can record video file according to the period you set here. For example, the alarm record period is from 6:00–18:00 Monday, device can record alarm video files during the 6:00–18:00.

All channels are record continuously by default. You can set customized record period and record type.

Step 1 Click Next button.

The Rec interface is displayed. See Figure 4-32.

Figure 4-32

Rec Channel D1 Pre-record 4 s Redundancy All Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday... Thursday Friday Saturday Default Copy Back Next

Step 2 Select a channel from the dropdown list, you can set different record plans for different channels. Select All if you want to set for all channels. See Table 4-9.

Table 4-9

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select a channel to record the video.
Pre-record	In the Pre-record list, enter the amount of time that you want to start the recording in advance.
Redundancy	If there are several HDDs installed to the Device, you can set one of the HDDs as the redundant HDD to save the recorded files into different HDDs. In case one of the HDDs is damaged, you can find the backup in the other HDD.Select Main Menu > STORAGE > HDD MANAGER, and then set a HDD as redundant HDD.Select Main Menu > STORAGE > SCHEDULE > Record, and then select the Redundancy check box.◇ If the selected channel is not recording, the redundancy function takes effect next time you record no matter you select the checkbox or not.◇ If the selected channel is recording, the current recorded files will be packed, and then start recording according to the new schedule.● This function is for some series products only.● The redundant HDD only back up the recorded videos but not snapshots.
ANR	You can set ANR (auto network resume) function.● The IPC continues record once the NVR and IPC connection fails. After the network becomes normal, the NVR can download record file during the offline period from the IPC. It is to guarantee there is no record loss on current connected IPC channel.● Set the max. record upload period. Once the offline period is longer than the period you set here, IPC can only upload the record file during the specified period.This function is for IPC that installed SD card and the record function is enabled.
Period	Define a period during which the configured recording setting is active. See Figure 4-33.The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.
Copy	Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

Figure 4-33

Period Current Date: Sunday Period 1 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS Period 2 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS Period 3 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS Period 4 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS Period 5 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS Period 6 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS Copy All Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednes Thursday Friday Saturday OK Cancel

Step 3 Set record type. See Figure 4-34.

Figure 4-34

All Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS

- When the record type is MD (motion detect), alarm, MD&Alarm, IVS and POS, enable the channel record function when corresponding alarm occurs. For example, when the alarm type is MD, select Main Menu > ALARM > VIDEO DETECTION > Motion Detect, select the record channel and enable record function. See Figure 4-35.

- When the record type is MD (motion detect), alarm, MD&Alarm, IVS and POS, refer to "4.8.5 Video detect", "4.8.3 Alarm", "4.7.2.4 IVS" and "Step 3 POS" for detailed information.

Figure 4-35

Motion Detect Video Loss Tampering Scene Change PIR Alarm Channel D1 Region Setting Enable MD Period Setting Anti-Dither 5 s Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting Post-Record 10 s PTZ Activation Setting Tour Setting Picture Storage Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Copy Refresh Apply Back

Step 4 Set record period. It includes edit mode and draw mode. See Figure 4-36.

If you have added a holiday, you can set the record period for the holiday.

Figure 4-36

- Define the period by drawing.

1) Select a corresponding date to set.

Define for the whole week: Click ☐ next to All, all the icon switches to ☐, you can define the period for all the days simultaneously.
☐ Define for several days of a week: Click before each day one by one, the icon switches to You can define the period for the selected days simultaneously.

2) On the timeline, left click mouse and then drag to define a period.

There are six periods in one day, the Device starts recoding the selected event type in the defined period. In Figure 4-37, the different color bars stand for different record types.

◇ Green stands for general record.
◇ Yellow stands for MD (motion detection) record.
◇ Red stands for alarm record.
◇ Blue stands form intelligent record.
◇ Orange stands for MD&Alarm record.
◇ Purple stands for POS record.
Once the time period overlaps, the record priority: MD&Alarm > Alarm > POS > Intelligent > MD > General.
◇ Select a record type and then click the ◆ of the corresponding date to clear the corresponding period.

Figure 4-37

The MD record and alarm record function are both null if you enabled MD&Alarm function.

- Define the period by editing.

1) Select a date and then click

The Period interface is displayed. See Figure 4-38.

Figure 4-38

Period Current Date: Sunday Period 1 00:00 - 24:00 General MD Alarm MD&Alarm Intel POS Period 2 00:00 - 24:00 General MD Alarm MD&Alarm Intel POS Period 3 00:00 - 24:00 General MD Alarm MD&Alarm Intel POS Period 4 00:00 - 24:00 General MD Alarm MD&Alarm Intel POS Period 5 00:00 - 24:00 General MD Alarm MD&Alarm Intel POS Period 6 00:00 - 24:00 General MD Alarm MD&Alarm Intel POS Copy All Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Apply Cancel

2) Set record type for each period.

◇ There are six periods for you to set for each day.

Under Copy, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.

3) Click Apply to save the settings.

Step 5 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Enable auto record function so that the record plan can become activated. Refer to "4.1.4.6.3 Record control" for detailed information.

4.1.4.6.2 Snapshot Schedule

You can set schedule snapshot period.

After set schedule snapshot, device can snapshot image according to the period you set here. For example, the alarm snapshot period is from 6:00–18:00 Monday, device can snapshot during the 6:00–18:00 when an alarm occurs.

Step 1 Click Snapshot button, device goes to following interface. See Figure 4-39.

Select Main Menu > STORAGE > SCHEDULE > Snapshot, you can go to the snapshot interface.

Figure 4-39

Snapshot Channel D1 All Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday... Thursday Friday Saturday Default Copy Back OK

Step 2 Select a channel to set schedule snapshot.

Step 3 Set snapshot type as schedule. Refer to "4.2.5.2 Snapshot" for detailed information.

Step 4 Check the box to set alarm type. See Figure 4-40.

Figure 4-40

All Regular MD Alarm MD&Alarm IVS POS

- When the record type is MD (motion detect), alarm, MD&Alarm, IVS and POS, enable the channel record function when corresponding alarm occurs. For example, when the alarm

type is MD, select Main Menu > ALARM > VIDEO DETECTION > Motion Detect, select the record channel and enable record function. See Figure 4-35.

- When the record type is MD (motion detect), alarm, MD&Alarm, IVS and POS, refer to "4.8.5 Video detect", "4.8.3 Alarm", "4.7.2.4 IVS" and "Step 3 POS" for detailed information.

Figure 4-41

Motion Detect Video Loss Tampering Scene Change PIR Alarm Channel D1 Region Setting Enable MD Sensitivity 3 Period Setting Anti-Dither 5 s Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting Post-Record 10 s PTZ Activation Setting Tour Setting Picture Storage Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Copy Refresh Apply Back

Step 5 Refer to "4.1.4.6.1 Recording Schedule" to set snapshot period.

Step 6 Click Apply button to save snapshot plan.

[Non-Text]

Enable auto snapshot function so that the snapshot plan can become activated. Refer to "4.1.4.6.3 Record control" for detailed information.

4.1.4.6.3 Record Control

After set schedule record or schedule snapshot, you need to enable auto record and snapshot function so that system can automatically record or snapshot.

- Auto: System automatically records at the type and record period you set in Schedule interface.

- Manual: System records general files for all day.

You need to have storage authorities to implement the Manual record operation. Make sure the HDD has been properly installed.

Step 1 Right click mouse and then select Manual > Record or select Main Menu >

STORAGE > RECORD. See Figure 4-42.

For some series products, after you logged in, you can click the Rec button at the front panel to go to the Record interface.

Figure 4-42

Main Stream All 1 2 3 4 5 6 Auto Manual Off Sub Stream1 Auto Manual Off Sub Stream2 Auto Manual Off Snapshot Enable Disable Apply Back

Step 2 Configure parameters.

Parameter	Description
Channel	Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels. You can select a single channel or select All.
Record status	• Auto: Automatically record according to the record type and recording time as configured in the recording schedule.• Manual: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected channel.• Off: Do not record.
Snapshot status	Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding channels.

Step 3 Click Apply.

4.2 Camera

4.2.1 Connection

Select Main menu > REGISTRATION > Camera Registration, you can register the remote device. See Figure 4-43.

After register the remote device to the NVR, you can view the video on the NVR, and manage and storage the video file. Different series products support different remote device amount.

Figure 4-43

Camera Registr... Status Firmware Upgrade Show Filter Null Uninitialized IP Address Search 92 Edit Preview Status IP Address Manufa 1 Onvif 2 Onvif 3 Private 4 Private 5 Private 6 Private Device Search Initialize Modify IP Add Manual Add Added Device Link Info Channel Edit Delete Status IP Address Port Device N. D1 80 DS-2CD1 D2 37777 IPC-HF82 D3 37777 1E013051 D4 37777 2M047E7 D5 37810 DSS Wine D6 37777 IVSS Delete H.265 Auto Switch Import Export Residue bandwidth/T... 293.28Mbps/320.00Mbps

4.2.1.1 Changing IP address

Step 1 Select Main Menu > REGISTRATION > Camera Registration, check the box before

the camera name and then click Modify IP or click the before the camera name.

Enter Modify IP interface. See Figure 4-44.

Check the box before several cameras, change the IP addresses of several cameras at the same time.

Figure 4-44

Modify IP Checked Device No.:1 DHCP STATIC IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Username admin Password Incremental Value 1 1 Serial No. IP Address 1 32.5420 OK Cancel

Step 2 Select IP mode.

• Check DHCP, there is no need to input IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. Device automatically allocates the IP address to the camera.
• Check Static, and then input IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and incremental value.

• If it is to change several devices IP addresses at the same time, input incremental value. Device can add the fourth address of the IP address one by one to automatically allocate the IP addresses.
• If there is IP conflict when changing static IP address, device pops up IP conflict dialogue box. If batch change IP address, device automatically skips the conflicted IP and begin the allocation according to the incremental value

Step 3 Input remote device user name and password.

When change IP addresses of several devices at the same time, make sure the cameras user name and passwords are the same.

Step 4 Click OK button to save settings.

After the modification and then search again, device displays new IP address.

Auto Changing H.265

For the remote device that first registered to the system, it can automatically adopts encode format as H.265 if you enable H.265 Auto switch function.

Click H.265 Auto Switch button at the bottom of the interface, it is from

The function is enabled. See Figure 4-45.

Figure 4-45

Camera Registr... Status Firmware Upgrade Show Filter Null Uninitialized IP Address Search 92 Edit Preview Status IP Address Manufa 1 ✓ ✓ ✓ Onvif 2 ✓ ✓ ✓ Onvif 3 ✓ ✓ ✓ Private 4 ✓ ✓ ✓ Private 5 ✓ ✓ ✓ Private 6 ✓ ✓ ✓ Private Device Search Initialize Modify IP Add Manual Add Added Device Link Info Channel Edit Delete Status IP Address Port Device N. D1 ✓ ✓ ● 80 DS-2CD1 D2 ✓ ✓ ● 37777 IPC-HF82 D3 ✓ ✓ ● 37777 1E01305I D4 ✓ ✓ ● 37777 2M047E7 D5 ✓ ✓ ● 37810 DSS Wine D6 ✓ ✓ ● 37777 IVSS Delete H.265 Auto Switch Import Export Residue bandwidth/T... 293.28Mbps/320.00Mbps

4.2.1.2 IP Export

Device can export the Added device list to your local USB device.

Step 1 Insert the USB device and then click the Export button. The Browse interface is displayed. See Figure 4-46.

Figure 4-46

Browse Device Name sda1(USB USB) Refresh Format Total Space 14.83 GB Free Space 1.37 GB Address / Name Size Type Delete ...Trashes 4.0 KB File IVSS Folder ...Trashes Folder Merry.jpg 2.75 MB File Trashes Folder Scan.pdf 14.56 MB File File Backup Encr... New Folder OK Back

Step 2 Select Address to save export file.

Step 3 Click the OK button.

Device pops up a dialogue box to remind you successfully exported.

When exporting IP address, the File Backup Encryption check box is checked by default. The file information includes IP address, port, channel number, manufacturer, user name, and password.

• If you select the File Backup Encryption check box, the file format is .backup.
• If you clear the File Backup Encryption check box, the file format is .csv. In this case, there might be a risk of data leakage.

4.2.1.3 IP Import

Step 1 Click Import button.

The Browse interface is displayed. See Figure 4-47.

Figure 4-47

Browse Device Name sda1(USB USB) Refresh Format Total Space 14.83 GB Free Space 1.37 GB Address / Name Size Type Delete ...Trashes 4.0 KB File IVSS Folder .Trashes Folder Merry.jpg 2.75 MB File Trashes Folder Scan.pdf 14.56 MB File .Spotlight-V100 Folder File Name New Folder OK Back

Step 2 Go to Address to select the import file and then click the OK button.

System pops up a dialogue box to remind you successfully imported.

If the imported IP has conflicted with current added device, system pops up a dialogue box to remind you. You have two options.

Step 3 Click OK button.

The imported information is on the Added Device list.

4.2.2 Remote Device Initialization

Remote device initialization can change remote device login password and IP address.

• When connect a camera to the NVR via PoE port, NVR automatically initialize the camera. The camera adopts NVR current password and email information by default.
• When connect a camera to the NVR via PoE port after NVR upgraded to the new version, the NVR may fail to initialize the camera. Go to the Registration interface to initialize the camera.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > Camera Registration.

The Camera Registration interface is displayed.

Step 2 Click Device Search and then click Uninitialized.

Device displays camera(s) to be initialized.

Step 3 Select a camera to be initialized and then click Initialize.

The Enter Password interface is displayed. See Figure 4-48.

Figure 4-48

Enter Password ✓ Using current device password and email info. Next

Step 4 Set remote device password and email information.

If you want to use current device password and email information, the remote device automatically uses NVR admin account information (login password and email). There is no need to set password and email. Go to step 6.

1) Cancel Using current device password and email info, The Enter Password interface is displayed. See Figure 4-49.

Figure 4-49

Enter Password □ Using current device password and email info. User admin Password Use a password that has 8 to 32 characters, it can be a combination of letter(s), number(s) and symbol(s) with at least two kinds of them.(please do not use special symbols like ' '; &) Confirm Password Next

2) Configure parameters. See Table 4-10.

Table 4-10

Parameter	Description
User	The default is admin.
Password	The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding "", "", ";", :, ": " &").Enter a strong password according to the password strength bar indication.
Confirm Password

For your device own safety, create a strong password of your own choosing. We also recommend you change your password periodically especially in the high security system.

Step 5 Click Next button.

The Password Protection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-50.

Figure 4-50

Password Protection ✓ Email Address To reset password, please input properly or update in time Back Next Skip

Step 6 Set email information.

Input an email address for reset password purpose.

Cancel the box and then click Next or Skip if you do not want to input email information here.

Step 7 Click Next button.

The Network interface is displayed. See Figure 4-51.

Figure 4-51

Modify IP Checked Device No.: 1 DHCP STATIC Username admin Password IP Address Incremental Value 1 Subnet Mask Default Gateway Serial No. IP Address 1 32.2434 OK Cancel

Step 8 Set camera IP address.

• Check DHCP, there is no need to input IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. Device automatically allocates the IP address to the camera.
• Check Static, and then input IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and incremental value.

• If it is to change several devices IP addresses at the same time, input incremental value. Device can add the fourth address of the IP address one by one to automatically allocate the IP addresses.
• If there is IP conflict when changing static IP address, device pops up IP conflict dialogue box. If batch change IP address, device automatically skips the conflicted IP and begin the allocation according to the incremental value

Step 9 Click Next button.

The Device Initialization interface is displayed. See Figure 4-52.

Figure 4-52

Device Initialization Device Initialization Finished 1 IP Address Serial No. Results 1 000000000000000 Initialize:Succeed Modify IP:Succeed Finished

Step 10 Click Finished to complete the setup.

4.2.3 Short-Cut Menu to Register Camera

If you have not registered a remote device to a channel, go to the preview interface to add.

Step 1 On the Preview interface, Move your mouse to window.

There is an icon "+ " on the channel window. See Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53

Dark background with a small circular gray icon containing a white star-like symbol (no text or symbols)

Step 2 Click "+" device pops up interface to add network camera. Refer to "4.1.4.4 Registration" for detailed information.

4.2.4 Image

You can set network camera parameters according to different environments. It is to get the best video effect.

Step 1 Select Main Menu> CAMERA> IMAGE.

The IMAGE interface is displayed. See Figure 4-54.

Figure 4-54

Channel D6 Config File Config1 Image Brightness - + 0 Contrast - + 0 Saturation - + 0 Sharpness - + 0 Gamma - + 0 Mirror On Off IPC Exposure Iris On Off 3D NR On Off WB Mode Auto BLC Mode Stop Day&Night Mode Color Default Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-11.

Different series network camera displays different parameters. The actual product shall prevail.

Step 3 Click Apply.
Table 4-11

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure.
Config File	There are three config files for you. System has configured the corresponding parameters for each file, you can select according to your actual situation.
Brightness	Adjusts the image brightness. The bigger the value is, the brighter the image will become. Adjusts the brightness according to actual environment.
Parameter	Description
Contrast	Adjusts the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will become. Adjusts the contrast according to actual environment.
Saturation	Adjusts the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color will become. Adjusts the saturation according to actual environment.
Sharpness	Adjusts the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the image edge is. Adjusts the sharpness according to actual environment.
Gamma	It is to adjust image brightness and enhance the image dynamic display range. The bigger the value is, the more bright the video is.
Mirror	Enable the function, the left and right side of the video image will be switched. It is disabled by default.This function is for some series products only.
Field of view	It is to set monitor video display direction. It includes normal, reflection, lobby 1, lobby 2.
Exposure	• Auto iris	• It is for the camera of auto iris only.• After enable auto iris function, the iris can automatically zoom in/zoom out according to the brightness of the environment and the image brightness changes too.• If disable the auto iris function, the iris does not automatically zoom in/zoom out according to the brightness of the environment when the iris is at the biggest value.
	• 3D NR	• This function specially applies to the image which frame rate is configured as 2 at least. It reduces the noises by making use of the information between two frames. The bigger the value is, the better the effect.
Parameter	Description
BLC	You can set camera BLC mode.Self-adaptive: In the backlight environment, the system can automatically adjust image brightness to clearly display the object.BLC:Default: The device auto exposures according to the environments situation so that the darkest area of the video is clearedCustomize: After select the specified zone, the system can expose the specific zone so that the zone can reach the proper brightness.WDR: In backlight environment, it can lower the high bright section and enhance the brightness of the low bright section. So that you can view these two sections clearly at the same time.HLC: In the backlight environment, it can lower the brightness of the brightest section and reduce the area of the halo and lower the brightness of the whole video.Stop: It is to disable the BLC function.
WB	You can set camera WB mode. It can affect the image whole hue so that the image can accurately displays the environment status.Different cameras supports different WB modes such as auto, manual ,natural light, outdoor and etc.
Day & Night	Configure the color and black&white mode of the image. This setting is not affected by the configuration files. The default setting isAuto.Color: The camera outputs color image only.Auto: Depends on the camera, such as overall brightness and whether there is an IR light, either color image or black&white image is output.B/W: The camera outputs Black and white image only.Sensor: It is to set when there is peripheral connected IR light.The Sensor item is for some non-IR device only.

4.2.5 Encode

You can set video bit stream and image parameters.

4.2.5.1 Encode

You can set video bit stream parameters such as bit stream type, compression, resolution.

Some series products support three streams: main stream, sub stream 1, sub stream 2. The sub stream maximally supports 1080P.

Step 1 Select Main menu > CAMERA > ENCODE > ENCODE.

The ENCODE interface is displayed. See Figure 4-55.

Figure 4-55

ENCODE Snapshot Channel 2 Main Stream Smart Codec Type General Compression H.264 Resolution 1920x1080(1080P) Frame Rate(FPS) 22 Bit Rate Type CBR Quality 3 Frame Interval 7 S Bit Rate(Kb/S) Customized (8... 3072 More Setting Sub Stream Video Type Sub Stream1 Compression H.264H Resolution 704x576(D1) Frame Rate(FPS) 25 Bit Rate Type CBR Quality 4 Frame Interval 2 S Bit Rate(Kb/S) Customized (2... 1024 More Setting Default Copy Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-12.

Step 3 Click More Setting.
The More Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-56.
Table 4-12

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.
Smart Codec	Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the storage space.● : I.● : J.
Type	Main Stream: In the Type list, select General, MD (Motion Detect), or Alarm.Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.
Compression	In the Compression list, select the encode mode.H.265: Main profile encoding. This setting is recommended.H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high definition.H.264: Main profile encoding.H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher bit stream compared with other settings for the same definition.
Resolution	In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on your device model.
Frame Rate (FPS)	Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value is, the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes along with the resolution.Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30. However, the actual range of frame rate that you can select depends on the capability of the Device.
Bit Rate Type	In the Bit Rate Type list, select CBR (Constant Bit Rate) or VBR (Variable Bit Rate). If you select CBR, the image quality cannot be configured; if you select VBR, the image quality can be configured.
Quality	This function is available if you select VBR in the Bit Rate List.The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.
I Frame Interval	The interval between two reference frames.
Bit Rate (Kb/S)	In the Bit Rate list, select a value or enter a customized value to change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.

Figure 4-56

More Setting Audio Encode Audio Format G.711Mu Audio Source NORMAL Audio Sampling 16000 OK Cancel

Step 4 Configure parameters. See Table 4-13.

Table 4-13

Parameter	Description
Audio Encode	This function is enabled by default for main stream. You need to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled, the recorded video file is composite audio and video stream.
Audio Format	In the Audio Format list, select a format: G711a, G711u, PCM, AAC.
Audio Sampling	• In the Audio Sampling list, you can select audio sampling rate.

Step 5 Click OK.

Back to Encode interface.

Step 6 Click Apply.

4.2.5.2 Snapshot

You can set snapshot mode, image size, quality and interval.

Step 1 Select Main menu > CAMERA > ENCODE > Snapshot.

The SNAPSHOT interface is displayed. See Figure 4-57.

Figure 4-57

ENCODE Snapshot Snapshot 1 /Time Channel D1 Mode Timing Image Size 1200x720(720P) Image Quality 5 Interval 1 Second Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-14.

Step 3 Click Apply.
Table 4-14

Parameter	Description
Manual Snap	In theManual Snaplist, select how many snapshots you want to take each time.
Channel	In theChannellist, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.
Mode	In theModelist, you can selectTiming, orTrigger.Timing: The snapshot is taken during the scheduled period.Trigger: The snapshot is taken when there is an alarm event occurs, such as motion detection event, video loss, and loca alarms.
Image Size	In the Image Size list, select a value for the image. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.
Image Quality	Configure the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level is, the better the image will become.
Interval	Configure or customize the snapshot frequency. Max. supports 3600 seconds/image.

4.2.6 Channel Name

You can set customized channel name.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > CAM NAME.

The CAM NAME interface is displayed. See Figure 4-58.

Figure 4-58

D1 CAM 1 D2 CAM 2 D3 HAHA1HH D4 IPC D5 CAM 5 D6 CAM 6 D7 CAM 7 D8 CAM 8 D9 CAM 9 D10 CAM 10 D11 CAM 11 D12 CAM 12 D13 CAM 13 D14 CAM 14 D15 CAM 15 D16 CAM 16 < 1/4 > Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Modify a channel name.

• You can only change the camera connected via the private protocol.
  ● The channel name supports 63 English characters.

Step 3 Click Apply.

4.2.7 Remote Upgrade

You can upgrade the connected network camera firmware. It includes online upgrade and file upgrade.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > CAMERA > REGISTRATION > Upgrade.

The Upgrade interface is displayed. See Figure 4-59.

Figure 4-59

Camera Registr... Status Firmware Upgrade Device Upgrade(0/6) Device Type None Channel Status IP Address System Version Status 1 ● 4.000.000000 To be upgr 2 ● 4.000.000000 To be upgr 3 ● 4.000.000000.0,2019-06-06 To be upgr 4 ● 4.000.000000.0.R,2019-06-... 5 ● 4.000.000000.0. 6 ● 4.000.000000. File Upgrade Manual Check Online Upgrade

Step 2 Update the firmware of the connected remote device.

- Online Upgrade

1) Select a remote device and then click the Detect button on the right side, or check a box to select a remote device and then click Manual Check. System detects the new version on the cloud.

2) Select a remote device that has new version and then click online upgrade. After successful operation, system pops up upgrade successful dialogue box.

- File upgrade

1) Select a channel and then click File Upgrade.

2) Select upgrade file on the pop-up interface.
3) Select the upgrade file and then click OK button.

After successful operation, system pops up upgrade successful dialogue box.

If there are too much remote devices, select Device Type from the drop-down list to search the remote device you desire.

4.2.8 Remote Device Info

4.2.8.1 Device Status

You can view the connection and alarm status of the corresponding channel.

Select Main Menu > CAMERA > REGISTRATION > Status, the Status interface is displayed.

See Figure 4-60. Refer to Table 4-15 for detailed information.

Figure 4-60

Camera Registr... Status Firmware Upgrade Device Status Channel Status IP Address MD Video Loss Tampering 1 ● 172.12.20.244 ● ● ● 2 ● 172.12.70.357 -- -- -- 3 ● 172.12.12.172 ● ● ● 4 ● 172.15.70.236 ● ● ● 5 ● 172.12.12.221 -- -- -- 6 ● 172.27.58 ● ● ● Refresh

Table 4-15

Icon	Description	Icon	Description
	IPC works properly.		IPC does not support.
	There is an alarm.		Video loss occurs.

4.2.8.2 Firmware

You can view IP address, manufacturer, type, system version of the connected remote device.

Select Main Menu > CAMERA > REGISTRATION > Firmware, the Firmware interface is displayed. See Figure 4-61.

Figure 4-61

Camera Registr... Status Firmware Upgrade Channel IP Address Manufacturer Type System Version 1 172.12.245.244 Onvif DS-2CD-1225-13 2 172.12.70.157 Private 3 172.12.12.172 Private F5-F5-231E-1 2.420.000000R,ACI 5 4 172.12.70.156 Private F5-F5-231E-1 2.420.000000T,ACI 7 5 172.12.12.171 Private 6 172.12.7354 Private CH-RSSTZ4 2.300.00000010.R,2 Refresh

4.3 Live View

After you logged in, the system goes to multiple-channel live view mode by default. You can view the monitor video of each channel.

The displayed window amount may vary. The actual product shall prevail.

4.3.1 Preview

On Preview interface, you can view the monitor video of each channel. The corresponding channel displays date, time, and channel name after you overlay the corresponding information. Refer to the following table for detailed information. See Table 4-16.

Table 4-16

SN	Icon	Description
1		When current channel is recording, system displays this icon.
2		When motion detection alarm occurs, system displays this icon.
3		When video loss alarm occurs, system displays this icon.
4		When current channel is in monitor lock status, system displays this icon.
5		When the device connects to the network camera remotely, system displays this icon.This function is for some series products only.

4.3.2 Navigation bar

You can quickly perform operation through the icon on the navigation bar.

• Different series products may display different navigation bar icons. Refer to the actual product for detailed information.
• Select Main Menu > SYSTEM > GENERAL > General to enable navigation bar function and then click Apply; otherwise you cannot see the following interface.

Step 1 On the preview interface, left click mouse,

You can see navigation bar. See Figure 4-62. Refer to Table 4-17 to view detailed information.

Figure 4-62

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Table 4-17

Icon		Function
		Open Main Menu.
		Expand or condense the navigation bar.
		Select view layout.
		Go to the previous screen.
Icon		Function
		Go to the next screen.
		Enable tour function. The icon switches to Close the tour or the triggered tour operation has cancelled, device restores the previous preview video.
		Open the PTZ control panel. For details, see "4.4.2 PTZ Control".
		Open the Color Setting interface. For details, see "4.4.2 PTZ Control."This function is supported only in single-channel layout.
		Open the record search interface. For detail, see "4.6.2 Search Interface."
		Open the Broadcast interface. For detail, see "4.17.3 Broadcast."
		Open the EVENT interface to view the device alarm status. For details, see "4.8.2 Alarm Status."
		Open the CHANNEL INFO interface to display the information of each channel. For details, see " 4.3.2.1 Channel Info."
		Open the CAMERA REGISTRATION interface. For details, see "4.1.4.4 Registration."
		Open the NETWORK interface. For details, see " 4.12 Network."
		Open the HDD MANAGER interface. For details, see " 4.13.3 HDD."
		Open the USB MANAGER interface. For details about USB operations, see " 4.3.2.2 USB Manager."

4.3.2.1 Channel Info

After the remote device registered to the corresponding channel, you can view its status such as alarm status, record status, connection status, record mode, etc.

• Alarm status: It includes motion detection alarm, video loss alarm, tampering alarm.
• Record status: System is recording or not.
  ● Bit Rate: System displays bit rate information.
  ● Status: current channel connection status.

Click button, system goes to the channel information setup interface. You can view information of the corresponding channel. See Figure 4-63.

Figure 4-63

CHANNEL INFO Cha... Motion De... Video ... Tampering Record St... Bit Rate(... Status Record ... D1 -- -- -- -- 4147 Pre-record D2 -- -- -- -- 0 Pre-record D3 -- -- -- -- 1712 Pre-record D4 -- -- -- -- 7808 Pre-record D5 -- -- -- -- 0 Pre-record D6 -- -- -- -- 0 Pre-record Refresh

4.3.2.2 USB Manager

After connecting the USB device, you can copy log, config file to USB device or update NVR system.

Click a system goes to HDD Manager interface. You can view and manage HDD information. See Figure 4-64.

Here you can view USB information, backup file, and update system. Refer to "4.11 File Backup", "4.10.1 Log", "4.10.4.2 IMP/EXP", "4.10.4.4 System Update" for detailed information.

Figure 4-64

USB MANAGER Name Type Total Space Used Space Free Space File BackupLoad Backup Config Backup System Upgrade

4.3.3 Preview Control Interface

Move your mouse to the top center of the video of current channel; you can see system pops up the preview control interface. See Figure 4-65. If your mouse stays in this area for more than 6 seconds and has no operation, the control bar automatically hides.

Slight difference may be found on the user interface.

Figure 4-65

1 2 3 4 5 6

4.3.3.1 Instant Replay

You can playback the previous 5-60 minutes record of current channel.

Click to go to the instant replay interface. See Figure 4-66.

Figure 4-66

Aerial view of a paved plaza with trimmed hedges and trees, no visible text or symbols.

Instant replay is to playback the previous 5 minutes to 60 minutes record of current channel.

• Move the slider to choose the time you want to start playing.
  ● Play, pause and close playback.
• The information such as channel name and recording status icon are shielded during instant playback and will not display until exited.
  ● During playback, screen split layout switch is not allowed.
  ● Tour high higher priority than the instant playback. The instant playback function is null when tour function is in process and the preview control interface auto hides either. The function becomes valid again after tour is complete.

Go to the Main Menu > SYSTEM > GENERAL > General to set Instant Replay time. See Figure 4-67. System may pop up a dialogue box if there is no such record in current channel.

Figure 4-67

General Date&Time Holiday Device Name NVR Device No. 8 Language ENGLISH Video Standard PAL Sync to Remote Device (Include language... Instant Replay(Min.) 5 Auto Logout(Min.) 10 Monitor Channel(s) when logout IPC Time Sync 24 IPC Time Sync Period (hour) Navigation Bar Mouse Sensitivity Slow Fast Apply Back

4.3.3.2 Digital zoom

You can zoom in specified zone of current channel so that you can view the details. It supports zoom in function of multiple-channel. It includes the following two ways:

• Click 📋, the icon switches to 🔒. Hold down the left mouse button to select the area you want to enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released.
• Point to the center that you want to enlarge, rotate the wheel button to enlarge the area.

- For some models, when the image is enlarged in the first way described previously, the selected area is zoomed proportionally according to the window.

The digital zoom interface is shown as in Figure 4-68. When the image is in the enlarged status, you can drag the image toward any direction to view the other enlarged areas. Right click mouse to cancel zoom and go back to the original interface.

Figure 4-68

Security camera panel with HBI logo and magnifying glass, showing status bar and warning sign

HBI

Close-up of a door handle with a curved handle (no visible text or symbols)

4.3.3.3 Instant backup

You can record the video of any channel and save the clip into a USB storage device.

By clicking, the recording is started. To stop recording, click this icon again. The clip is automatically saved into the connected USB storage device.

You can record the video of any channel and save the clip into a USB storage device.

4.3.3.4 Manual Snapshot

You can take one to five snapshots of the video and save into a USB storage device.

By clicking you can take snapshots. The snapshots are automatically saved into the connected USB storage device. You can view the snapshots on your PC.

To change the quantity of snapshots, select Main Menu > CAMERA > ENCODE > Snapshot, in the Manual Snap list, select the snapshot quantity.

4.3.3.5 Bidirectional talk

You can perform the voice interaction between the Device and the remote device to improve efficiency of emergency.

Step 1 Click button to start bidirectional talk function the icon now is shown as . Now the rest bidirectional talk buttons of digital channel becomes null too.

Step 2 Click again, you can cancel bidirectional talk.

4.3.3.6 Switch bit streams

Via this function, you can switch the channel main stream/sub stream according to current network bandwidth.

● M: Main stream. Its bit streams are big and definition is high. It occupies large network bandwidth suitable for video wall surveillance, storage and etc.
- S: Sub stream. Its definition is low but occupies small network bandwidth. It is suitable for general surveillance, remote connection and etc.

to switch the bit stream type of the main stream and sub stream.

M: Main stream.
- S: Sub stream. Some series products support two sub streams (S1, S2). Refer to "4.2.5.1 Encode" for detailed information.

4.3.3.7 Right-Click Menu

By right-clicking the menu, you can quickly access the corresponding functional interface and perform relevant operations, including entering the main menu, searching records and selecting screen split mode.

Right-click on the preview interface and the right-click menu is displayed. See Figure 4-69. Refer to Table 4-18 for detailed information.

The right-click menu is different for different models. The actual interface shall prevail.

Figure 4-69

Main Menu Search PTZ View 1 View 4 View 8 View 9 View 16 View 25 View 36 Sequence Smart Tracking Custom Split Camera Registration Manual Preview Mode Crowd Distribution Auto Focus Image Sub Port

Table 4-18

Function	Description
Main Menu	Open Main Menu interface.
Search	Open the PLAYBACK interface where you can search and play back record files. For details, see "4.6 Playback and Search."
PTZ	Open the PTZ interface. For details, see "4.4 PTZ."
View1/4/8/9/16/25/36	Configure the live view screen as a single-channel layout or multi-channel layout.
Sequence(View Layout)	Set customized screen split mode and channels. For details, see "4.3.4 Sequence."
Previous Screen	Click Previous Screen to go to the previous screen. For example, if you are using 4-split mode, the first screen is displaying the channel 1-4, click Next screen, you can view channel 5-8.
Next Screen
Camera Registration	Open the CAMERA REGISTRATION interface. For details, see "4.1.4.4 Registration."
Manual	Select Record, you can configure the recording mode as Auto or Manual, or stop the recording. You can also enable or disable snapshot functionSelect Alarm Out, you can configure alarm output settings.
Preview Mode	There are two modes: regular/AI mode.
Crowd Distribution	Select enable/disable to start/stop crowd distribution function.
Auto focus	Click to realize auto focus function. Make sure the connected camera supports auto focus function.
Image	Click to modify the camera properties. For details, see "4.2.4 Image".
Sub Port	Click Sub Port, you can go to control the sub screen.

4.3.4 Sequence

You can set customized view layout.

The preview layout restores default channel layout after Default operation.

Step 1 On the preview interface, right click mouse and then click Sequence.

The Sequence interface is displayed. See Figure 4-70.

• Enter edit view interface, device automatically switches to the max split amount mode.
• The channel list on the edit view interface displays the added camera channel

number and channel name.

ans camera is online.

camera is

offline.

- In case the channel amount has exceeded the device max split amount, the edit view interface can display the max screen number amount and current screen number.

Figure 4-70

Sequence D1 CAM 1 D2 CAM 2 D3 HAHA1HH D4 IPC D5 CAM 5 D6 CAM 6 < 1/2 > Apply Cancel

Step 2 On the edit view interface, drag the channel to the desired window, or drag on the preview window to switch the position.

Check the channel number at the right bottom corner to view the current channel sequence. See Figure 4-71.

Figure 4-71

Sequence D1 CAM 1 D2 CAM 2 D3 HAHA1HH D4 IPC D5 CAM 5 D6 CAM 6 < 1/2 > Apply Cancel

Step 3 Click Apply to save current channel sequence.

After you change the channel sequence, click Cancel button or right click mouse, device pops up the dialogue box. See Figure 4-72.

• Click OK to save current settings.
• Click No to exit without saving the settings.

Figure 4-72

Message The channel sequence has changed,do you want to save it now? Yes No

4.3.5 Fisheye (Optional)

This function is for some series products only.

4.3.5.1 Fisheye de-warp during preview interface

The fisheye camera (panoramic camera) has wide video of angle but its video is seriously

distorted. The de-warp function can present the proper and vivid video suitable for human eyes.

On the preview interface, select fisheye channel and then right click mouse, you can select fish eye. See Figure 4-73. You can set fisheye installation mode and display mode.

- For the non-fish eye channel, system pops up dialogue box to remind you it is not a fish eye channel and does not support de-warp function.

- If system resources are insufficient, system pops up the corresponding dialogue box too.

Figure 4-73

Main Menu Search PTZ View 1 View 4 View 8 View 9 View 16 View 25 View 36 Sequence Smart Tracking Custom Split Camera Registration Fisheye Manual Preview Mode Auto Focus Image

Now you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-74. You can set fish eye installation mode and display mode. There are three installation modes: ceiling mount/wall mount/ground mount.

● The different installations modes have different de-warp modes.

- Some series products support 180° de-warp. 180° de-warp fisheye supports wall mount de-warp only. The actual product shall prevail.

Figure 4-74

Fit Mode Show Mode

Refer to the following sheet for detailed information. See Table 4-19.

Table 4-19

Installation modes		Icon	Note
	(Ceiling mount)		360° panorama original view
	(Ground mount)		1 de-warp window+1 panorama stretching
			2 panorama stretching view
			1 360° panorama view+3 de-warp windows
			1 360° panorama view+4 de-warp windows
			4 de-warp windows+1 panorama stretching
			1 360° panorama view+8 de-warp windows
	(Wall mount)		360° panorama original view
			Panorama stretching
			1 panorama unfolding view+3 de-warp windows

		1 panorama unfolding view +4 de warp windows
		1 panorama unfolding view +8 de warp windows

Figure 4-75

Four-panel fisheye view of a multi-lane urban street scene with cars parked, no visible text or symbols

In Figure 4-75, you can adjust the color pane on the left pane or use your mouse to change the position of the small images on the right pane to realize fish eye de-warp.

Operation: Use mouse to zoom in/zoom out, move, and rotate the image (Not for wall mount mode.)

4.3.5.2 Fish eye de-warp during playback

When playing back the fisheye record file, you can use de-warp function to adjust video.

Step 1 On the main menu, click Backup button.

Step 2 Select 1-window playback mode and corresponding fish eye channel, click to play.

Step 3 Right click the, you can go to the de-warp playback interface. For detailed information, refer to "4.3.5.1 Fisheye de-warp during preview interface".

4.3.6 Test Temperature

When connecting to the front-end device that supports temperature detection, system can display instant temperature.

• This function may collect the human temperature in the surveillance video, be careful!
  ● This function is for some series products only.

Preparations

Refer to "4.16.1 Display" to enable test temperature function.

On the preview window, click any position on the thermal channel video. The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-76.

Figure 4-76

49.9 °C 15.810 37.610

4.3.7 AI Preview Mode

When you select AI mode, the system displays information of human face, personnel, vehicle and non-motor vehicle on the right side of the preview interface, and it supports to play back records and display feature attributes.

You need to enable face detection, body detection, vehicle detection and non-motor vehicle detection to support this function. For details, see "4.7.2.5 Video Structuring (Metadata)."

Step 1 Right click to select Preview Mode > AI Mode.

The AI preview interface is displayed. See Figure 4-77.

Figure 4-77

15358 2943 Age:Young Gender:Male Face:Normal GlassesNo 2 10:25:04 Age:Young Gender:Female Face:Normal GlassesNo 2 10:24:50 Age:Young Gender:Female Face:Normal GlassesNo 2 10:24:06 2 max 99% 2 10:21:58 Type Tripwire Alarms Object...

Step 2 (Optional) Double-click the image on the right to play the corresponding video.

Step 3 Click

The Properties interface is displayed. See Figure 4-78.

Figure 4-78

Properties Show Fac... Human B... Vehicle Di... Non-Motor Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Attribute:-- STRANGER Channel Time Channel Time Channel Similarity% Channel Time Channel Time Select attributes to display:(*Max. set 4 attributes) Age Gender Exp. Glasses Beard Mask OK Cancel

Step 4 (Optional) Click Show Face List and select attributes to display, including age, gender, expression, glasses, beard and mask.

Step 5 (Optional) Click Human Body Detection and select attributes to display, including top, pants, hat, bag, bag style, umbrella, age and gender. See Figure 4-79.

Figure 4-79

Properties Show Fac... Human B... Vehicle Di... Non-Motor Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Channel Time Channel Time Select attributes to display:(*Max. set 4 attributes) Top Bottom Hat Bag Umbrella Age Gender OK Cancel

Step 6 (Optional) Click Vehicle Display and select attributes to display, including vehicle logo, vehicle color, vehicle model, plate recognition, plate color, seatbelt, call, vehicle decorations and countries & regions. See Figure 4-80.

Figure 4-80

Properties Show Fac... Human B... Vehicle Di... Non-Motor Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Channel Time Select attributes to display: (*Max. set 4 attributes) Logo Vehicle ... Type Plate No. Plate C... Seatbelt Calling Ornament Region OK Cancel

Step 7 (Optional) Click Non-Motor and select attributes to display, including color, type and people number. See Figure 4-81.

Figure 4-81

Properties Show Fac... Human B... Vehicle Di... Non-Motor Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Attribute:-- Channel Time Select attributes to display:(*Max. set 4 attributes) Vehicle ... Type People ... Helmet OK Cancel

Step 8 Click OK to complete the setting.

The system can display four attributes at most.

4.4 PTZ

PTZ is a mechanical platform that carries a camera and a protective cover and performs overall control remotely. A PTZ can move in both horizontal and vertical direction to provide all-around view to the camera.

Before you control the PTZ, make sure the PTZ decoder and the NVR network connection is OK.

4.4.1 PTZ Settings

You can set different PTZ parameters for local type and remote type. Before you use local PTZ, make sure you have set PTZ protocol; otherwise you cannot control the local PTZ.

• Local: The PTZ device connects to the NVR via the cable.
• Remote: The PTZ device connects to the NVR via the network.

This function is for some series products only.

Step 1 Select Main menu > CAMERA > PTZ.

Step1 The PTZ interface is displayed. See Figure 4-82 (Local) or Figure 4-83 (Remote).

Figure 4-82

Channel D1 PTZ Type Local Protocol NONE Address 1 Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Check None Copy Apply Back

Figure 4-83

Channel D1 PTZ Type Remote Copy Apply Back

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-20.

Table 4-20

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to connect the PTZ camera to.
PTZ Type	Local: Connect through RS-485 port.Remote: Connect through network by adding IP address of PTZ camera to the Device.
Protocol	In the Protocol list, select the protocol for the PTZ camera such as PELCOD.
Address	In the Address box, enter the address for PTZ camera. The default is 1.The entered address must be the same with the address configured on the PTZ camera; otherwise the system cannot control PTZ camera.
Baud rate	In the Baud rate list, select the baud rate for the PTZ camera. The default is 9600.
Data Bits	The default is 8.
Stop Bits	The default is 1.
Parity	The default is NONE.

Step 3 Click Apply.

4.4.2 PTZ Control

PTZ control panel performs the operations such as directing camera in eight directions,

adjusting zoom, focus and iris settings, and quick positioning.

Basic PTZ Control Panel

Right-click on the live view screen and then select PTZ. The PTZ control panel is displayed. See Figure 4-84.

Figure 4-84

Sp... 5 - Zoom + - Focus + - Iris +

• The gray button means system does not support current function.
• For some series products, the PTZ function is valid in one-window mode.

Table 4-21

Parameter	Description
Speed	Controls the movement speed. The bigger the value is, the faster the movement will be.
Zoom
Focus
Iris
PTZ movement	Supports eight directions.
	Fast positioning button. Positioning: Click to enter the fast positioning screen, and then click anywhere on the live view screen, the PTZ will turn to this point and move it to the middle of the screen. Zooming: On the fast positioning screen, drag to draw a square onthe view. The square supports zooming.• Dragging upward is to zoom out, and dragging downward is to zoom in.• The smaller the square, the larger the zoom effect.This function is for some series products only and can only be controlled through mouse operations.
	Click can control the four directions (left, right, up, and down)PTZ movement through mouse operation.
	Click open the expanded PTZ control panel.

Expanded PTZ Control Panel

On the basic PTZ control panel, click to open the expanded PTZ control panel to find more options. See Figure 4-85.

Figure 4-85

Sp... 5 - Zoom + - Focus + - Iris + No. 1

• The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.
• Right-click once to return to the interface of PTZ basic control panel.

Table 4-22

Icon	Function	Icon	Function
	Preset		Auto Pan
	Tour		Flip
	Pattern		Reset
	Auto scan		Click the AUX Config icon to open the PTZ functions settings interface.
[8WGS]	AUX Switch	[TACK]	Click the Enter Menu icon to open the MENU OPERATION interface.

4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions

4.4.3.1 Configuring Presets

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

The Preset interface is displayed. See Figure 4-86.

Figure 4-86

PTZ Preset Tour Pattern Border Preset 1 Setting Del Preset

Step 4 Click the direction arrows to the required position.

Step 5 In the Preset box, enter the value to represent the required position.

Step 6 Click Setting to complete the preset settings.

4.4.3.2 Configuring Tours

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

The PTZ interface is displayed.

Step 2 Click the Tour tab.

The Tour tab is displayed. See Figure 4-87.

Figure 4-87

PTZ Preset Tour Pattern Border Preset 1 Patrol No. 0 Add Preset Del Preset Del Tour

Step 3 In the Patrol No. box, enter the value for the tour route.

Step 4 In the Preset box, enter the preset value.

Step 5 Click Add Preset.

A preset will be added for this tour.

• You can repeat adding more presets.
• Click Del Preset to delete the preset for this tour. This operation can be repeated to delete more presets. Some protocols do not support deleting.

4.4.3.3 Configuring Patterns

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

The PTZ interface is displayed.

Step 2 Click the Pattern tab.

The Pattern interface is displayed. See Figure 4-88.

Figure 4-88

PTZ Preset Tour Pattern Border Pattern 1 Start End

Step 3 In the Pattern box, enter the value for pattern.

Step 4 Click Start to perform the directions operations. You can also go to the PTZ Control Panel to perform the operations of adjusting zoom, focus, iris, and directions.

Step 5 On the PTZ interface, click End to complete the settings.

4.4.3.4 Configuring AutoScan

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

The PTZ interface is displayed.

Step 2 Click the Border tab.

The Border interface is displayed. See Figure 4-89.

Figure 4-89

PTZ Preset Tour Pattern Border Left Right

Step 3 Click the direction arrows to position the left and right borders.

4.4.4 Calling PTZ Functions

After you have configured the PTZ settings, you can call the PTZ functions for monitoring from the Expanded PTZ Control Panel. See Figure 4-90.

Figure 4-90

Sp... 5 - Zoom + - Focus + - Iris + No. 1

4.4.4.1 Calling Presets

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the preset that you want to call.

Step 2 Click to call the preset.

Step 3 Click again to stop calling the preset.

4.4.4.2 Calling Tours

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the tour that you want to call.

Step 2 Click to call the tour.

Step 3 Click again to stop calling the tour.

4.4.4.3 Calling Patterns

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the pattern that you want to call.

Step 2 Call to call the pattern.

The PTZ camera moves according to the configured pattern repeatedly.

Step 3 Click

ain to stop calling the pattern.

4.4.4.4 Calling AutoScan

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the border that you want to call.

Step 2 Click

The PTZ camera performs scanning according to the configured borders.

Step 3 Click

ain to stop auto scanning.

4.4.4.5 Calling AutoPan

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

start moving in horizontal direction.

Step 2 Click

ain to stop moving.

4.4.4.6 Using AUX Button

On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click , the AUX setting interface is displayed. See

Figure 4-91.

In the Direct Aux list, select the option that corresponds to the applied protocol.

In the Aux Num box, enter the number that corresponds to the AUX switch on the decoder.

Figure 4-91

AUX Direct Aux NONE On Off Aux Num 1 On Off

4.5 Record File

Device adopts 24-hour continuous record by default. It supports customized record period and record type. Refer to "4.1.4.6 Schedule" for detailed information.

4.6 Playback and Search

4.6.1 Instant Playback

You can view the record file of previous 5 to 60 minutes. Refer to "4.3.2 Navigation bar" for instant playback information.

4.6.2 Search Interface

You can search and playback the record fine on the NVR.

Select Main Menu > PLAYBACK, or on the preview interface right click mouse and then select Search, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-92.

The following figure for reference only.

Figure 4-92

From R/W HDD Rec Jan 2000 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Camera Name ✓ D1 Camera 01 M ✓ D2 HAHA1HH M ✓ D3 CAM 3 M ✓ D4 IPC M D5 CAM 5 M D6 CAM 6 M D7 CAM 7 M D8 M D9 CAM 9 M D10 CAM 10 M D11 CAM 11 M D12 CAM 12 M D13 CAM 13 M Stop Sync All Regular Alarm Motion IVS POS 24hr 2hr 1hr 30min

Table 4-23

No.	Function	Description
1	Display Window	Display the searched recorded video or picture. It supports playing in single-channel, 4-channel, 9-channel, and 16-channel simultaneously.When playing back in a single channel mode, hold down the left mouse button to select the area that you want to enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released. To exit the enlarged status, right-click on the image.
2	PlaybackControls Bar	Playback control buttons. Refer to "4.6.2.1 Playback Control" for detailed information.
	Clip	Click to edit the record file and then save specified footages.Refer to "4.6.2.3 Clip" for detailed information.
	Backup	Click to backup record. Refer to "4.6.2.4 Record Backup" for detailed information.
3	Time Bar	Display the type and time period of the current recorded video.In the 4-channel layout, there are four time bars are displayed; in the other view layouts, only one time bar is displayed.Click on the colored area to start playback from a certain time.In the situation when you are configuring the settings, rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is zooming in from 0. In the situation when playback is ongoing, rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is zooming from the time point where the playback is located.Time bar colors: Green indicates general type; Red indicates external alarm; Yellow indicates motion detection; Blue indicates intelligent events; Purple indicates POS events.For some models, when you are clicking on the blank area in the time bar, the system automatically jumps to the next time point where there is a recorded video located.
4	Play Status	Includes two playback status: Play and Stop.
	Sync	Select the Sync check box to simultaneously play recorded videos of different channels in the same period in multi-channel view.
	Record type	Select the check box to define the recording type to search for.
5	Search type	Select the content to play back: Record, PIC, Splice Playback. For details about the selecting search type, refer to "4.6.2.2 Search Type" for detailed information.
6	Calendar	Click the date that you want to search, the time bar displays the corresponding record.The dates with record or snapshot have a small solid circle under the date.
7	View Layout and Channel Selection	In the CAM NAME list, select the channel(s) that you want to play back.The window split is decided by how you select the channel(s). For example, if you select one channel, the playback is displayed in the single-channel view; if you select two to four channels, the playback is displayed in the four-channel view. The maximum is eight channels.Click to tch the streams. indicates main stream, and icates sub stream.
8	List Display	This area includes Mark List and File List.Different series products have different functions. The icons displayed may vary. The actual product shall prevail.Click the Mark List button, the marked recorded video list is displayed. Double-click the file to start playing.• : Click the File List button, the searched recorded video list is displayed. You can lock/unlock the files. Refer to "4.6.7 File List " for detailed information. • ye dewarp. It is to display the dewarp fisheye video. Refer to "4.3.5.2 Fish eye de-warp during playback" for detailed information.
14	Time Bar Unit	You can select 24hr, 2hr, 1hr, or 30min as the unit of time bar. The time bar display changes with the setting.

All the operations here (such as playback speed, channel, time and progress) have relationship with hardware version. Some series NVRs do not support some functions or playback speeds.

4.6.2.1 Playback Control

The playback control interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-93.

Figure 4-93

Media player control bar with playback, pause, and audio icons

Refer to the following sheet for more information. See Table 4-24.

Table 4-24

Icon		Function
		Play/PauseIn slow play mode, click it to switch between play/pause.
		StopWhen playing back, click to stop current playback process.
		Backward playIn normal play mode, left click the button, the file begins backward play. Click it again to pause current play.In backward play mode, click or to restore normal play.
		Display previous frame/next frame.When pause the normal playback file, click or to playback frame by frame.In frame by frame playback mode, click or to resume normal playback mode.
		Slow playIn playback mode, click it to realize various slow play modes such as slow play 1, slow play 2, and etc.
Icon		Function
		Fast forwardIn playback mode, click to realize various fast play modes such as fast play 1,fast play 2 and etc.
[WOYZ]		Adjust the volume of the playback.
		Smart search .Refer to "4.6.3 Smart Search Playback" for detailed information.
		Click the snapshot button in the full-screen mode, the system can snapshot 1 picture.System supports custom snap picture saved path. Connect the peripheral device first, click snap button on the full-screen mode, you can select or create path. Click Start button, the snapshot picture can be saved to the specified path.
		Mark button.This function is for some series product only. Make sure there is a mark button in the playback control pane.Refer to "4.6.4 Mark Playback" for detailed information.
		Display/hide POS information.In 1-channel playback mode, you can click it to display/hide POS information on the video.
		In 1-channel playback mode, click it to enable/disable display IVS rule information on the video.This function is for some series only.

4.6.2.2 Search Type

You can search the recorded videos, splice, or snapshots from HDD or external storage device.

- From R/W HDD: Recorded videos or snapshots playback from HDD of the Device. See Figure 4-94.

Figure 4-94

From R/W HDD RECORD

- From I/O Device: Recorded videos playback from external storage device. See Figure 4-95.

Click Browse, select the save path of recorded video file that you want to play. Double-click

the video file or click ▶ to start playing.

Figure 4-95

From I/O Device sdb5 Refresh Browse

4.6.2.3 Clip

This function allows you to clip some footages to a new file and then save it to the USB device. See Figure 4-96. Follow the steps listed below.

Step 1 Select a record first and then click to playback.

Step 2 Select a time at the time bar and then click to start clip,

Step 3 Select a time at the time bar and then click to stop clip,

Step 4 Click system pops up dialogue box to save the clip file.

Figure 4-96

00:00:00 - 00:00:00

• Clip function is for one-channel/multiple-channel.
  ● Max save 1024 files at the same time.
  ● This function is not for the file already checked in the file list.

4.6.2.4 Record Backup

This function is to backup files you checked in the file list, or the file you just clip.

Step 1 Select the recorded video file that you want to back up. You can select the following two types of files:

• Recorded video file: Click the File List area is displayed. Select the file(s) that you want to back up.
• Saves the clip footages as a record file.

Step 2 Click, the BACKUP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-97.

Figure 4-97

BACKUP 1 Name(Type) Free Space/Total Space Device Status 1 √ sdb5(USB DISK) 15.60 GB/15.60 GB Ready 2 √ CH Type Start Time End Time Size(KB) 1 √ 1 R 17-11-08 01:00:00 17-11-08 02:00:00 1847872 2 √ 1 R 17-11-08 02:00:00 17-11-08 03:00:00 1847632 Space Required / Space Remaining:3.52 GB/15.60 GB Backup Clear

Step 3 Click Backup to begin the process.

4.6.3 Smart Search Playback

This function is for some series product only.

During playback process, it can analyze the motion detect zone in the scene and give the analysis result.

This function is for channel that already enabled motion detect function (Main Menu > ALARM > VIDEO DETECT > Motion Detect).

Step 1 Select a channel to playback video and then click . You can view the grids on the playback video.

● This function is for one-channel playback mode.
- If you are in multiple-channel playback mode, double-click a channel first to switch to one-channel playback mode.

Step 2 Left click mouse and then drag to select smart search zones(22*18 (PAL), 22*15 (NTSC)).

Step 3 Click

detect record footages.

Step 4 Click

again to stop smart search function.

can view the grids on the

● The motion detect region cannot be the full screen zone.
- The motion detect region adopts the current whole play pane by default.
- Selects the other file on the list, system begins playing the motion detect footages of other file.
- The time bar unit switch, backward play, frame by frame are null when system is playing motion detect file.

4.6.4 Mark Playback

When you are playback record, you can mark the record when there is important information. After playback, you can use time or the mark key words to search corresponding record and then play. It is very easy for you to get the important video information.

- Add Mark

When system is playback, click Mark button, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-98.

Figure 4-98

Add Mark Mark Time 2017-11-08 04:28:22 Name Default OK Cancel

- Playback Mark

During 1-window playback mode, click mark file list button in Figure 4-92, you can go to mark file list interface. Double-click one mark file, you can begin playback from the mark time.

● Play before mark time

Here you can set to begin playback from previous N seconds of the mark time.

Usually, system can playbacks previous N seconds record if there is such kind of record file. Otherwise, system playbacks from the previous X seconds when there is such as kind of record.

- Mark Manager

Click the mark manager button on the Search interface (Figure 4-92); you can go to

Manager interface. See Figure 4-99. System can manage all the record mark information of current channel by default. You can view all mark information of current channel by time.

Figure 4-99

Manager Channel 5 Start Time 2017-11-08 00:00:00 End Time 2017-11-09 00:00:00 Search 2 CH Mark Time Name 1 5 2017-11-08 03:19:30 123 2 5 2017-11-08 10:30:34 456 Delete Cancel

- Modify

Double-click one mark information item, you can see system pops up a dialogue box for you to change mark information. You can only change mark name here.

- Delete

Here you can check the mark information item you want to delete and then click Delete button, you can remove one mark item.

- After you go to the mark management interface, system needs to pause current playback. System resume playback after you exit mark management interface.

- If the mark file you want to playback has been removed, system begins playback from the first file in the list.

4.6.5 Playback Image

Here you can search and play the image. Follow the steps listed below.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > PLAYBACK, or on the preview window right click mouse and then click Search, you can go to the Search interface.

Step 2 At the top right corner, select image and then input playback interval.

Step 3 Select date and channel, click to play.

4.6.6 Splice Playback

You can clip the recorded video files into splices and then play back at the same time to save your time.

This function is for some series products only.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > PLAYBACK, the PLAYBACK interface is displayed.

Step 2 In the Search Type list, select Splice Playback; In the Split Mode list, select 4, 9, or 16. See Figure 4-100.

Figure 4-100

From R/W HDD Splice Playback 4

Step 3 In the Calendar area, select a date.

Step 4 In the CAM NAME list, select a channel.

Only single-channel supports this function.

Step 5 Start playing back splices. See Figure 4-101.

- Click, the playback starts from the beginning.

- Double-click anywhere on the time bar, the playback starts from where you click.

Figure 4-101

4.6.7 File List

Click , system displays file list. It displays the first channel of the record. See Figure 4-102.

Figure 4-102

1 StartTime Type 00:00:00 R 01:00:00 R 02:00:00 R 03:00:00 R 04:00:00 R 05:00:00 R 06:00:00 R 07:00:00 R 08:00:00 R 09:00:00 R 10:00:00 R 11:00:00 R Start Time 17-11-08 00:00:00 End Time 17-11-08 01:00:00 Size(KB) 1847776

- Check a file name, double-click the file or click

- Input accurate time at the top column, you can search records of current day.

- System max displays 128 record files in one list.

- Click to go back to the calendar/channel selection interface.

Lock or Unlock File

- To lock the recorded video, on the File List interface, select the check box of the recorded

video, and then click The locked video will not be overwritten.

- To view the locked information, click 📄, the FILE LOCKED interface is displayed.

The recorded video that is under writing or overwriting cannot be locked.

- To unlock the recorded video, in the FILE LOCKED interface, select the video, and then click Unlock. See Figure 4-103.

Figure 4-103

FILE LOCKED 2 CH Type Start Time End Time Size(KB) 1 ✓ 1 B 2017 11 08 10:00:00 2017 11 08 11:00:00 1150416 2 ✓ 1 R 2017-10-21 00:00:00 2017-10-21 01:00:00 1919216 Unlock Cancel

4.6.8 Other Aux Functions

4.6.8.1 Digital Zoom

In 1-window playback mode, left click mouse to select any zone on the screen, you can zoom in current zone. Right click mouse to exit.

4.6.8.2 Switch Channel

• During playback mode, select from the dropdown list to switch playback channel.
• The smart search channel does not support this function either.
• When system is playing back the record file, click the number button at the front panel, system begins playing the record file of selected channel dated the same time.

4.7 AI

4.7.1 AI Search

You can search the record file on the NVR and filter the record file meets the corresponding rule. It is suitable for you to play the specified file.

This series NVR products support playback the AI by camera file only. AI by camera means the connected camera does all the AI analytics, and then gives the results to the NVR.

4.7.1.1 Face Detection

You can search the detected faces and play back.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > FACE DETECTION.

The FACE DETECTION interface is displayed. See Figure 4-104.

Figure 4-104

Channel 1 Start Time 2019-06-01 00 00 00 End Time 2019-06-01 23:59:59 Gender All Age All Classes All Board All Mask All Exp All Smart Search

Step 2 Select the channel, enter the start time and end time, and set for the gender, age, glasses, beard, and mask. Click Smart Search. The results are displayed. See Figure 4-105.

For privacy reason, the human face in the image is pixelated. The actual image is clear.

Figure 4-105

Face Detect All Export Backup Lock Add Mark Age Young Gender: Female Face Normal Glasses Yes Age Middle-aged Gender: Female Face Surprised Glasses Yes Age Teenager Gender: Female Face Confused Glasses No Age Young Gender: Female Face Disgusting Glasses No 2018-10-22 15:48:48 2018-10-22 16:11:04 2018-10-23 07:56:07 2018-10-23 07:56:17 Age Young Gender: Female Face Normal Glasses No Age Young Gender: Female Face Normal Glasses No Age Young Gender: Female Face Laugh Glasses Yes Age Young Gender: Female Face Normal Glasses No 2018-10-23 07:56:43 2018-10-23 12:38:28 2018-10-23 12:39:20 2018-10-23 13:20:51 Age Young Gender: Male Face Normal Glasses Yes Age Young Gender: Male Face Confused Glasses Yes Age Young Gender: Male Face Confused Glasses Yes Age Young Gender: Female Face Normal Glasses Yes 2018-10-23 14:45:06 2018-10-23 14:46:08 2018-10-23 14:47:05 2018-10-23 14:49:45 Age Young Gender: Female Face Normal Glasses No Age Young Gender: Male Face Normal Glasses No Age Young Gender: Male Face Normal Glasses No Age Young Gender: Female Face Smile Glasses No 2018-10-23 15:19:40 2018-10-23 15:27:30 2018-10-23 15:29:42 2018-10-23 15:35:17 Search Results:49 1/4 > >> 1 Go To

Step 3 Select the face that you want to play back. The picture with registered information is displayed.

You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.

- To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start. See Figure 4-106.

Figure 4-106

File Backup Device Name:sdb1(USB USB) 14.92 GB/14.93 GB(Free/Total) Path XVR/2018-10-23/ Browse ✓ Video Picture File Type DAV 1 ✓ Cha... Type Start Time End Time Size(KB) 1 ✓ 2 R 2018-10-23 12:38:25 2018-10-23 12:38:44 4890 6.48 MB(Space Needed) Start

• To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click Lock.
  • To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Mark.
• Go to Face Properties and Person Details to view detailed information.

4.7.1.2 Face Recognition

System can search and compare the human face on the video with the face image on the database, and playback the corresponding record file.

The AI search includes two ways: Search by attributes and search by image.

This function is for some series products only.

4.7.1.2.1 Searching by Attributes

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > FACE RECOGNITION > Search by Attributes.

The Search by Attributes interface is displayed. See Figure 4-107.

Figure 4-107

Search by Attri... Search by Image Channel 1 Start Time 2019 -05 -13 00:00:00 End Time 2019 -05 -13 23:59:59 Gender All Age All Glasses All Beard All Mask All Exp. All Similarity 80 % Smart Search

Step 2 Select the channel and set the parameters such as start time, end time, gender, age, glasses, beard, mask, and similarity according to your requirement.

Step 3 Click Smart Search.

The search result is displayed. See Figure 4-108.

The human face in the image is pixelated. The actual image is clear.

Figure 4-108

Face Recognition All Export Backup Lock Add Mark 2 99% 2018-10-23 12:38:34 Face Properties Person Details Search Results:1 1/1 1 Go To

Step 4 Click the picture that you want to play back.

The picture with registered information is displayed.

You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.

• To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start. See .
• To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click Lock.
  • To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Mark.
• Go to the Face Properties and Person Details to view detailed information.

4.7.1.2.2 Search by Image

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > FACE RECOGNITION > Search by Image.

The Search by Image interface is displayed. See Figure 4-109.

Figure 4-109

Search by Attni... Search by Image Face Library Local Upload *Max. upload 30 images.* Clear 0/0 Channel 1 Start Time 2019-05-13 00:00:00 End Time 2019-05-13 23:59:59 Similarity 80 % (50%~100%) Smart Search

Step 2 Select the channel and set the parameters such as start time, end time, gender, age, glasses, beard, mask, and similarity according to your requirement.

Step 3 Click Smart Search.

The search result is displayed. See Figure 4-110.

The human face in the image is pixelated. The actual image is clear.

Figure 4-110

Face Library Face L: 2 Name Gender All ID No. Reset Search Nomencl Gender:Male ID No:

Step 4 Click the picture that you want to play back.

The picture with registered information is displayed.

You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.

• To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
• To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click Lock.
  • To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Mark.
• Go to the Face Properties and Person Details to view detailed information.

4.7.1.3 IVS

You can search and playback the alarm record files.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > IVS.

The IVS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-111.

Figure 4-111

Channel 1 Start Time 2019-06-01 00:00:00 End Time 2019-06-01 23:59:59 Event Type All Effective Target Person Vehicle Non-Motor Smart Search

Step 2 Select a channel, start time, end time, event type, and then click Smart search, The search result is displayed.

Step 3 Click the picture that you want to play back.

You can also do the following operations to the recorded files.

• To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
• To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click Lock.
  • To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Mark.
• Go to the Face Properties and Person Details to view detailed information.

4.7.1.4 Human Body Detection

You can search the human body and search the alarm record during the specified period.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > HUMAN BODY DETECTION.

The Human Body Detection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-112.

Figure 4-112

Channel 1 Start Time 2019 -05 -13 00 :00 :00 End Time 2019 -05 -13 23 :59 :59 Top All Top Color All Bottom All Bottom Color All Hat All Bag All Gender All Age All Umbrella All Smart Se...

Step 2 Select a channel, start time, end time, and set corresponding parameters.

Step 3 Click Smart search.

The search result is displayed. See Figure 4-113.

For privacy reason, the human face in the image is pixelated.

Figure 4-113

HUMAN BODY DETECTION All Export Backup Lock Add Mark Top:Long Sleeve Bottom:Pants Hat:No Bag:No 2019-05-13 20:12:28 2019-05-13 20:14:07 2019-05-13 20:15:56 2019-05-13 20:16:51 Top:Short Sleeve Bottom:Shorts Hat:No Bag:No 2019-05-13 20:17:23 2019-05-13 20:17:33 2019-05-13 20:17:42 2019-05-13 20:19:10 Top:Short Sleeve Bottom:Shorts Hat:No Bag:No 2019-05-13 20:17:53 2019-05-13 20:19:10 2019-05-13 20:19:19 Top:Short Sleeve Bottom:Shorts Hat:No Bag:No 2019-05-13 20:19:52 Top:Short Sleeve Bottom:Shorts Hat:No Bag:No 2019-05-13 20:20:31 Top:Long Sleeve Top Color:Black Bottom:Pants Bottom Color:Blue Hat:No Bag:No Umbrella:No Age:Young Gender:Male Search Results:33 << < 2/3 > >> 2 Go To

Step 4 Select one or multiple results, and then you can

• To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
• To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click Lock.
  • To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Mark.
• Go to the Face Properties and Person Details to view detailed information.

4.7.1.5 Vehicle Detection

You can search according to the vehicle parameters and search the alarm record during the specified period.

This function is for some series products only.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > VEHICLE DETECTION.

The VEHICLE DETECTION interface is displayed. See Figure 4-114.

Figure 4-114

Channel 1 Start Time 2019-06-01 00:00:00 End Time 2019-06-01 23:59:59 Plate No. All Vehido Color All Type All Logo All Plate Color All Ornament All Calling All Seatbelt All Smart Search

Step 2 Select a channel and set parameters.

• System supports plate fuzzy search.
• System searches all plate numbers by default if you have not set a plate number.

Step 3 Click Smart search.

The search result is displayed.

Step 4 Select one or multiple results, and then you can:

• To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
• To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click Lock.
• To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Mark.

4.7.1.6 Non-motor Vehicle Detection

You can search according to the non-motor vehicle parameters and search the alarm record during the specified period.

This function is for some series products only.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > NON-MOTOR VEHICLE DETECTION.

The NON-MOTOR VEHICLE DETECTION interface is displayed. See Figure 4-115.

Figure 4-115

Channel 1 Start Time 2019-06-01 00:00 00 End Time 2019-06-01 23:59 59 Type All Vehicle Color All People Number All Helmet All Smart Search

Step 2 Select the channel and the time, and then select one or multiple features from Type, Vehicle Color, People Number, or Helmet.

Step 3 Click Smart Search. The search result is displayed. See Figure 4-116.

Figure 4-116

NON-MOTOR VEHICLE DETECTION All Export Backup Lock Add Mark Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:18:19 Vehicle Color:White Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:19:05 Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:19:28 Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:20:14 Vehicle Color:White Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:20:59 Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:21:24 Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:22:08 Vehicle Color:White Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:22:54 Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:23:18 Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:24:03 Vehicle Color:White Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:24:48 Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:25:11 Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:25:56 Vehicle Color:White Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:26:42 Vehicle Color:Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:27:06 Vehicle Color Blue Type:Two-wheel... People Number:1 Helmet:Yes 2019-05-15 20:27:29 Search Results:184 1/12 > >> 1 Go To

Step 4 Select one or multiple results, and then you can

• To back up the recorded files to the external storage device, select files, click Backup, select the save path and file type, and then click Start.
• To lock the files to make it unable to be overwritten, select the files, and then click Lock.
  • To add a mark to the file, select the files and then click Add Mark.

4.7.1.7 People Counting

You can detect the people amount in the specified zone, and display the statistics image.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > PEOPLE COUNTING. The PEOPLE COUNTING interface is displayed. See Figure 4-117.
Figure 4-117

Channel D9 Preset 1_Preset1 Rule People Counting Report Type Daily Report *Max 24 hours. Start Time 2000 -01 -01 00 :00 :00 End Time 2000 -01 -02 00 :00 :00 Type People Counting Report Search Export People Counting Statistics C... Histogram/ Polygon Enters Exits Display No. People No. 10 8 6 4 2 0 Hour

Step 2 Set parameters such as channel, report type, start time, end time, etc. See Table 4-25.

Table 4-25

Parameter	Description
Channel	Select the channel you want to search people amount.
Rule	Select the rule from the dropdown list.
Report Type	Select report type from the dropdown list: daily report, monthly report, yearly report.
Start time/end time	Set search start time and end time.
Type	Select from the dropdown list.

4.7.1.8 Heat map

You can detect the active objects distribution in the monitor zone during the specified period, and use different colors to display on the heat map report.

4.7.1.8.1 Normal

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > HEAT MAP > NORMAL.

The Normal interface is displayed. See Figure 4-118.

Figure 4-118

NORMAL Fisheye Channel D9 Preset 2_Preset2 Start Time 2019 -05 -01 00 : 00 : 00 End Time 2019 -05 -28 00 : 00 : 00 *The report search period shall be within one month. Search Export Heat Map

Step 2 Select channel, start time, end time.

Step 3 Click Search.

Step 4 System display heat map report.

Click Export, and then select path. Click Save to save current report to the USB device.

4.7.1.8.2 Fisheye

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > SMART SEARCH > HEAT MAP > Fisheye.

The Fisheye interface is displayed. See Figure 4-119.

Figure 4-119

NORMAL Fisheye Channel D10 Type By people number Start Time 2019 -05 -01 00 : 00 : 00 End Time 2019 -05 -28 00 : 00 : 00 *The report search pe... Search Export There is no data in current period.

Step 2 Set Channel, Type, Start Time, End time.

Step 3 Click Search.

Step 4 System displays heat map report.

Click Export and then select saved path, click Save to save the heat map report to the USB device.

4.7.2 Parameters

4.7.2.1 Smart Plan

The smart plan is for the smart network camera. It includes IVS, human face detection, human face recognition, human body detection, people counting, heat map. If you do not set a rule here, you cannot use these AI intelligent functions when you are connecting to a smart network camera.

This series NVR products support AI by camera only. Make sure the connected network camera supports intelligent functions. For NVR, it just displays the intelligent alarm information from the smart network camera and set or playback the record file.

Step 1 Select Main menu > AI > PARAMETERS > SMART PLAN.

The SMART PLAN interface is displayed. See Figure 4-120.

Figure 4-120

Channel 8 Add Preset1 Preset1 Preset2

Step 2 Select a channel number.

System displays different smart plan interfaces since the remote device may supports different functions.

- The interface is shown as Figure 4-121 if the remote device supports preset function.

Figure 4-121

Channel 8 Add Preset1 Preset1 Preset2

1) Select a channel.
2) Select a preset.
3) Click the smart plan icon at the bottom left. The icon becomes highlighted.
4) Click Apply.

elete the preset.

- Click Add to add a preset.

- Once the remote device does not support preset function, the interface is shown as in Figure 4-122.

Figure 4-122

Channel D10 Refresh Apply Cancel

1) Select a channel.
2) Click the smart plan icon. The icon becomes blue highlighted.
3) Click Apply.

4.7.2.2 Face Detection

The Device can analyze the pictures captured by the camera to detect whether the faces are on the pictures. You can search and filter the recorded videos the faces and play back.

Preparations

The connected camera shall support human face detection function.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > FACE DETECTION. The FACE DETECTION interface is displayed. See Figure 4-123.

Figure 4-123

Channel Enable Face ROI D2 Type Rule AI by Camera Setting Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 0 Sec. Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 Sec. Tour Setting Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to configure face detection function, and then enable it.

Step 3 Configure the parameters. See Table 4-26.

Table 4-26

Parameter	Description
Type	This series NVR products support AI by Camera only. AI by Camera means the connected camera does all the AI analytics, and then gives the results to the NVR.
Face Rol	Check the box to enable Face Rol function, system displays human face at the enhanced way.
Rule	Click Setting to draw areas to filter the target.You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and minimum size). When the target is smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger than the minimum size. Left click to drag the four angles to adjust the size.
Period	Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel fo recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and clickSettingto select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
VoicePrompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.[IMAGE]Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.7.2.3 Face Recognition

You can compare the detected faces with the faces in the library to judge if the detected face belongs to the library. The comparison result will be displayed on the AI mode live view screen and smart search interface, and link the alarms.

This series NVR products support AI by camera only.

You can use the connected camera to realize AI function. Make sure the connected camera supports human face detection function.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > FACE RECOGNITION. The FACE RECOGNITION interface is displayed. See Figure 4-124.

Figure 4-124

Channel Enable Face ROI Period Target Face Database AI Mode 0 E... Delete Face Library Name Simil... Modify Trigger Default Refresh Apply Cancel Type AI by Camera

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to configure face recognition function, and then enable it.

Step 3 At Type, system supports AI by Camera only.

Step 4 Set parameters. See Table 4-27.

Table 4-27

Parameter	Description
Rol	Check the box to enable Rol function, system displays human face at the enhanced way.
Rule	Click Setting to draw areas to filter the target.You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and minimum size).When the target is smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger than the minimum size. Left click to drag the four angles to adjust the size.
Period	Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
Target Face Database	Click Target Face Database, system displays face database list. Select a database from the dropdown list to compare.

Step 5 Set the Target Face Database.

Step 6 （Optional）Click 📋 to modify the similarity. The lower the number is, the easier the alarm linkage will trigger.

Step 7 Click to set the alarm linkage. See Figure 4-125.

Refer to "4.7.3 Database" for human target database settings information.

Figure 4-125

Trigger Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 Sec. Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PTZ Setting Post Record 10 Sec. Tour 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Snapshot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Video Matrix Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None OK Back

Step 8 Configure the parameters. See Table 4-28.

Table 4-28

Parameter	Description
Period	Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need tol set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel fo recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and clickSettingto select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
VoicePrompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.[IMAGE]Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

Step 9 Click OK, system goes back to human face recognition interface.

Step 10 Click Apply to complete the settings.

The interface is shown as Figure 4-126 if there is matched result.

Figure 4-126

Photo of a modern office interior with employees at desks and overlaid facial recognition bounding boxes showing age, gender, and facial expressions.

4.7.2.4 IVS (General Behavior Analytics)

The IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match with the specified rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules, the system activates alarms.

● This function is for some series product only.

- IVS function and human face detection function cannot be valid at the same time.

The IVS function environment shall meet the following requirements:

● The object total size shall not be more than 10% of the whole video.

- The object size on the video shall not be more than 10pixels*10 pixels. The abandoned object size shall be more than 15pixels*15 pixels (CIF resolution). The object width shall not be more than 1/3 of the video height and width. The recommended height is 10% of the video.

● The object and the background brightness different shall be more than 10 grey levels.

- The object shall remain on the video for more than 2 seconds. The moving distance is larger than its own width and shall not be smaller than 15 pixels (CIF resolution).

- The surveillance environment shall not be too complicated. The IVS function is not suitable for the environment of too many objects or the changing light. - The surveillance environment shall not contain glasses, reflection light from the ground, and water. Free of tree branches, shadow, mosquito and bugs. Do not use the IVS function in the backlight environment, avoid direct sunlight.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > IVS.

The IVS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-127.

Figure 4-127

Channel D6 Type AI by Camera 0 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Select a channel from the dropdown list.

Click Add and then set corresponding rule. See Figure 4-128.

Click to delete the selected rule.

Figure 4-128

Channel D6 Type AI by Camera 1 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete 1 Rule1 Tripwire Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 3 Set corresponding parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply.

4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire

When the detection target crosses the warning line along the set direction, the system performs an alarm linkage action.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > IVS.

In the Type drop-down list, select Tripwire. See Figure 4-129.

Figure 4-129

Channel D6 DDNS Type AI by Camera 1 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete 1 ✓ Rule1 Tripwire ✓ Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click 📋 to draw the rule on the surveillance video, the system displays as Figure 4-130.

Figure 4-130

Tripwire Name Rule1 Direction A To B OK

2) Configure the parameters. See Table 4-29.

Table 4-29

Parameter	Description
Name	Customize the rule name.
Direction	Set the tripwire direction, including A→B, B→A and A↔B.
Filter target	Click ilter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the size of the area with the mouse.Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.
AI Recognition	Select AI recognition and the system displays alarm target. The default selection is person and motor vehicle and system automatically identifies the person and motor vehicle appeared within the monitoring range.When you select IVS of AI by camera, the connected channel shall support tripwire function.

1) Press and hold down the left button on the monitor screen to draw the line. The line can be a straight line or a curve.
2) Click OK to complete the rule setting.

Step 3 Click

System displays the Trigger interface. See Figure 4-131.

Figure 4-131

Trigger Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 Sec. □ Alarm Upload □ Send Email ✓ Record Channel Setting □ PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 Sec. □ Tour Setting □ Buzzer ✓ Log □ Voice Prompts None Default Apply Back

Step 4 Configure the parameters. See Table 4-30.

Step 5 Click OK to save the alarm setting.
System displays the IVS interface.
Table 4-30
Step 6 Select the Enable check box and click Apply to complete the tripwire setting.

Parameter	Description
Period	Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel for recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

4.7.2.4.2 Intrusion

When the detection target passes the edge of the monitoring area, and enters, leaves or traverses the monitoring area, the system performs an alarm linkage action.

Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Intrusion. See Figure 4-132.

Figure 4-132

Channel D6 Type AI by Camera 1 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete 1 Rule1 Intrusion Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video, the system displays as
2) Figure 4-133.

Figure 4-133

Intrusion Name Rule1 Action Appear Cross Direction Both OK area1

3) Configure the parameters. See Table 4-31.

Table 4-31

Parameter	Description
Name	Customize the rule name.
Action	Set the intrusion action, including appear and crossing area.
Direction	Set the direction to cross the area, including enter, exit and both.
Filter target	Click ilter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the size of the area with the mouse.[IMAGE]Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.
AI recognition	Select AI recognition and the system displays alarm target. The default selection is person and motor vehicle and system automatically identifies the person and motor vehicle appeared within the monitoring range.

4) Press and hold down the left button on the monitoring screen to draw the monitoring area.
5) Click OK to complete the rule setting.

Step 3 Click 📄, you can refer to the "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.

Step 4 Select the Enable check box and click Apply to complete the intrusion setting.

4.7.2.4.3 Abandoned Object Detection

System generates an alarm when there is abandoned object in the specified zone.

Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Abandoned Object.

The interface is shown as Figure 4-134.

Figure 4-134

Channel D8 Type AI by Camera 9 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete 1 ✓ Rule 1 Abandoned ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 2 ✓ Rule 2 Intrusion ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 3 ✓ Rule 3 Loitering ... ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 4 ✓ Rule 4 Parking ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 5 ✓ Rule 5 Fast-Moving ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 6 ✓ Rule 6 Abandoned ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 7 ✓ Rule 7 Missing ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 8 ✓ Rule 8 Crowd Ga... ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 9 ✓ Rule 1 Cross Virt... ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-135.

Figure 4-135

Abandoned Preset 2_Preset2 Name Rule 1 Duration 10 5 OK

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-32.

Table 4-32

Parameter	Description
Preset	Select a preset you want to use IVS
Name	Input customized rule name
Duration	System can generate an alarm once the object is in the zone for the specified period.
Filter target	Click ilter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the size of the area with the mouse.Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.

3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.

Step 3 Click, you can refer to the "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.4 Fast moving

You can detect the fast moving object in the specified zone.

Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Fast Moving.

The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-136.

Figure 4-136

Channel D8 Type AI by Camera 8 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete 1 ✓ Rule 1 Fast-Moving ✓ 2 ✓ Rule 2 Intrusion ✓ 3 ✓ Rule 3 Loitering ... ✓ 4 ✓ Rule 4 Parking ✓ 5 ✓ Rule 5 Fast-Moving ✓ 6 ✓ Rule 6 Abandoned ✓ 7 ✓ Rule 7 Missing ✓ 8 ✓ Rule 8 Crowd Ga... ✓ Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-137.

Figure 4-137

Fast-Moving Preset 2_Preset2 Name Rule 1 Sensitivity - + 5 OK object

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-33.

Table 4-33

Parameter	Description
Preset	Select a preset you want to use IVS
Name	Input customized rule name
Sensitivity	You can set alarm sensitivity. The value ranges from 1 to 10.The default setup is 5.
Filter target	Click filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the size of the area with the mouse.[IMAGE]Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.

3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.

Step 3 Click, you can refer to the "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.5 Crowd Gathering

System can generate an alarm once the people amount gathering in the specified zone is larger than the threshold.

Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Crowd Gathering Estimation. The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-138.

Figure 4-138

Channel D8 Type AI by Camera 8 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete 1 ✓ Rule 1 Crowd Ga... ✓ ❄ ❄ 2 ✓ Rule 2 Intrusion ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 3 ✓ Rule 3 Loitering ... ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 4 ✓ Rule 4 Parking ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 5 ✓ Rule 5 Fast-Moving ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 6 ✓ Rule 6 Abandoned ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 7 ✓ Rule 7 Missing ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 8 ✓ Rule 8 Crowd Ga... ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-139.

Figure 4-139

Crowd Gathering Esti... Preset 2_Preset2 Name Rule 1 Duration 10 S Sensitivity - + 5 OK

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-34.

Table 4-34

Parameter	Description
Preset	Select a preset you want to use IVS.
Name	Input customized rule name
Duration	Set the minimum time that the object stays until the alarm is triggered.
Filter target	Click ilter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the size of the area with the mouse.Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.

3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.

Step 3 Click, you can refer to the "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.6 Parking

When the detection target stays in the monitoring area for more than the set duration, the system performs alarm linkage action.

Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Parking.

The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-140.

Figure 4-140

Channel D8 Type AI by Camera 8 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete 1 ✓ Rule 1 Parking ✓ 2 ✓ Rule 2 Intrusion ✓ 3 ✓ Rule 3 Loitering ... ✓ 4 ✓ Rule 4 Parking ✓ 5 ✓ Rule 5 Fast-Moving ✓ 6 ✓ Rule 6 Abandoned ✓ 7 ✓ Rule 7 Missing ✓ 8 ✓ Rule 8 Crowd Ga... ✓ Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-141.

Figure 4-141

Parking Preset 2_Preset2 Name Rule 1 Duration 6 s OK

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-35.

Table 4-35

Parameter	Description
Preset	Set the preset point for IVS detection according to the actual needs.
Name	Customize the rule name.
Duration	Set the minimum time that the object stays until the alarm is triggered.
Filter target	Click filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the size of the area with the mouse.Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.

3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.

Step 3 Click, you can refer to the "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.7 Missing Object Detection

System generates an alarm when there is missing object in the specified zone.

Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Missing Object.

The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-142.

Figure 4-142

Channel D8 Type AI by Camera 8 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete 1 ✓ Rule 1 Missing ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 2 ✓ Rule 2 Intrusion ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 3 ✓ Rule 3 Loitering ... ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 4 ✓ Rule 4 Parking ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 5 ✓ Rule 5 Fast-Moving ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 6 ✓ Rule 6 Abandoned ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 7 ✓ Rule 7 Missing ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ 8 ✓ Rule 8 Crowd Ga... ✓ ❄ ❄ ❄ Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-143.

Figure 4-143

Missing Preset 2_Preset2 Name Rule 1 Duration 10 5 OK

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-36.

Table 4-36

Parameter	Description
Preset	Set the preset point for IVS detection according to the actual needs.
Name	Customize the rule name.
Duration	Set the minimum time that the object stays until the alarm is triggered.
Filter target	Click filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the size of the area with the mouse.Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.

3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.

Step 3 Click, you can refer to the "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.4.8 Loitering Detection

System can generate an alarm once the object is staying in the specified zone longer than the threshold.

Step 1 In the Type drop-down list, select Loitering Detection.

The interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-144.

Figure 4-144

Channel D8 Type AI by Camera 8 Enable Name Type Draw Trigger Delete 1 ✓ Rule 1 Loitering ... ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 2 ✓ Rule 2 Intrusion ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 3 ✓ Rule 3 Loitering ... ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 4 ✓ Rule 4 Parking ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 5 ✓ Rule 5 Fast-Moving ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 6 ✓ Rule 6 Abandoned ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 7 ✓ Rule 7 Missing ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 8 ✓ Rule 8 Crowd Ga... ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Add Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video. See Figure 4-145.

Figure 4-145

Loitering Detection Preset 2_Preset2 Name Rule 1 Duration 5 s OK

2) Set parameters. See Table 4-37.

Table 4-37

Parameter	Description
Preset	Set the preset point for IVS detection according to the actual needs.
Name	Customize the rule name.
Duration	Set the minimum time that the object stays until the alarm is triggered.
Filter target	Click filter the target. Check the blue wireframe and adjust the size of the area with the mouse.Each rule can set 2 target filters (maximum size and minimum size), that is, when the passing target is smaller than the minimum target or larger than the maximum target, no alarm will be generated. The maximum size should not be smaller than the minimum size.

3) Draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a zone, until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse.
4) Click OK to complete the rule setting.

Step 3 Click, you can refer to the "4.7.2.4.1 Tripwire" to set other parameters.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.5 Video Structuring (Metadata)

The device can detect and extract key features from the human body, motor vehicle, and non-motor vehicles in the video, and then build a structured database. You can search any target you need with these features.

After enable the video structuring function, the corresponding smart plan can become valid.

Preparations

Make sure the connected camera supports video structuring (metadata) function.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > VIDEO STRUCTURING.

The VIDEO STRUCTURING interface is displayed. See Figure 4-146.

Figure 4-146

Channel D1 Type AI by Camera Personnel Detection Face Detection Vehicle Detection Non-motor Vehicle Detection Default Refresh Apply Cancel

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel that you want to configure video structuring function, and then enable it. See Table 4-38.

Table 4-38

Parameter	Description
Human Detection	Select Human detection and then check the box to enable this function.
Face Detect	Select Face Detect and then check the box to enable this function.
Vehicle detection	Select Vehicle detection and then check the box to enable this function.
Non-motor Vehicle	Select Non-motor Vehicle and then check the box to enable this function.

Step 3 Click Apply.

4.7.2.6 Crowd Distribution

Connecting to the front-end device that supports crowd distribution function, system can support the crowd distribution function. It supports crowd distribution event subscription and receive. It supports crowd distribution global and regional density settings, linkage alarm and triggered video storage, or upload the data to the platform. After connecting to the general network camera, the system adopts the algorithm to analyze the crowd density and trigger the

corresponding actions.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > CROWD DISTRIBUTION. The CROWD DISTRIBUTION interface is displayed. See Figure 4-147.
Figure 4-147

Channel Enable Global D6 Crowd Density 4 Human/m² Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 0 Sec. Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 Sec. Tour Setting Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Alarm Tracking Default Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-39.

Table 4-39

Parameter	Description
Channel	Select a channel from the dropdown list.
Enable	Check the box to enable the function.
Global	Check the box to enable global crowd distribution alarm.
Crowd Density	Configure the alarm threshold. The default setup is 4 persons/ m^2 . The value ranges from 2 to 10.
Period	Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel for recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and clickSettingto select the channel and PTZ action.When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the setup.

4.7.2.7 People Counting

System adopts video image and graphics analysis technology. System can calculate the entry/exit people amount in the specified zone on the video. It can generate an alarm when the amount has exceeded the threshold.

4.7.2.7.1 People Counting

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > PEOPLE COUNTING > PEOPLE COUNTING.

The PEOPLE COUNTING interface is displayed. See Figure 4-148.

Figure 4-148

PEOPLE COUN... Queuing Channel D6 Enable Rule Type People Counting Rule RULE Alarm Setting Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 0 Sec. □ Alarm Upload □ Send Email Record Channel Setting PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 Sec. Tour Setting Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Refresh Apply Back LIVE

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-40.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the setup.
Table 4-40

Parameter	Description
Channel	Select a channel from the dropdown list.
Enable	Check the box to enable the function.
Rule Type	Select a people counting rule type.
Rule	Click RULE to set statistics region, name, direction.
Alarm	Click Setting to set alarm parameters.OSD Overlay: Check the box here; you can view the people amount on the surveillance video.Entry No.: You can set people entry amount. System can generate an alarm once the amount has exceeded the threshold.Exit No.: You can set people exit amount. System can generate an alarm once the amount has exceeded the threshold.Remaining No.: You can set people staying amount in the zone. System can generate an alarm once the amount has exceeded the threshold.
Period	Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel fo recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

4.7.2.7.2 Queuing

After connecting to the AI fisheye camera that supports the queuing function, system can realize the corresponding linkage actions once the people amount in the queue or the waiting time has trigger an alarm. Select a region first to set the corresponding actions. For the same line, the queue people number alarm and queue time alarm has the same linkage actions.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > PEOPLE COUNTING > Queuing.

The Queuing interface is displayed. See Figure 4-149.

Figure 4-149

PEOPLE COUN... Queuing Channel D8 Region Alarm Type Queue People No. A... Queue Time Alarm Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 0 Sec. Send Email Record Channel Setting PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 Sec. Tour Setting Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-41.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the setup.
Table 4-41

Parameter	Description
Channel	Select a channel from the dropdown list.
Region	Set queue detection region.
Alarm Type	Select Queue People No. Alarm or Queue Time Alarm.
Period	Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel for recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

4.7.2.8 Heat map

Heat map technology can monitor the active objects distribution status on the specified zone during a period of time, and use the different colors to display on the heat map.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > HEAT MAP.

The HEAT MAP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-150.

Figure 4-150

Channel D9 Enable Period Setting Default Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 Select a channel number and then check the box to enable the function.

Step 3 Click Setting button.

The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-151.

Figure 4-151

Setting All 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 15 18 20 22 24 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Default OK Back

Step 4 Set arm/disarm period. There are two modes for you to set the period so that the system can detect the specified zone.

- Define the period by drawing.

1. Select the corresponding date and then use mouse to drag the bar to set period.

Define for the whole week: Click ☐ next to All, all the icon switches to ☑, you can define the period for all the days simultaneously.

☐ Define for several days of a week: Click before each day one by one, the icon switches to You can define the period for the selected days simultaneously.

- Define the period by editing.

1) Click the 📄 of the corresponding date, and then set the period on the pop-up interface. Click OK to save.
◇ There are six periods for you to set for each day.
Under Copy, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.
2) Click Apply to save the settings.

Step 5 Click Apply button to complete setup.

After set the heat map parameters, go to Main Menu > INFO > EVENT > HEAT MAP to view heat map report. Refer to "4.7.1.8 Heat map" for detailed setup information.

4.7.2.9 ANPR

System uses the video recognition technology to extract the plate number on the surveillance video and then compare it with the specified plate information. System can trigger an alarm once there is a matched result.

You can set different plate recognition rule, alarm linkage actions in different environments (blacklist, whitelist and regular).

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > PARAMETERS > ANPR.

The ANPR interface is displayed. See Figure 4-152.

Figure 4-152

Channel Enable Regular Blacklist Whitelist Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 Sec. Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 Sec. Tour Setting Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 Select the Enable check box to enable ANPR.

Step 3 Click Regular (default), Blacklist or Whitelist tab to configure it.

Before activate blacklist alarm or whitelist alarm, you need to add the corresponding plate information. Refer to "4.7.3.2 B/W List" for detailed information.

● Regular: Device triggers an alarm when it detects any plate number.
- Blacklist: Device triggers an alarm when it detects plate number in the blacklist.
- Whitelist: Device triggers an alarm when it detects plate number in the whitelist.

Step 4 Set parameters. See Table 4-42.

Step 5 Click Apply.
Table 4-42

Parameter	Description
Period	Configure the period and in the set time range, the corresponding configuration item will be linked to start the alarm.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel for recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and clickSettingto select the channel and PTZ action.When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
Voice Prompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

4.7.3 Database

After you successfully set the face library, the detected human face can compare with the image on the face library. The face library settings include create face library, add human face and human face modeling.

For privacy reason, the human face is pixelated.

4.7.3.1 Creating Human Face Library

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > DATABASE > FACE LIBRARY.

The FACE LIBRARY interface is displayed. See Figure 4-153.

Figure 4-153

Type Local 1 Face Library Name Register... Failure p... Error pe... Status Edit Details 1 vip 0 0 0 Arming Modeling Refresh Add Del

Step 2 Select a channel and then click Add. System displays Add interface. See Figure 4-154.

Figure 4-154

Add Face Library Name Save Back

Step 3 Input human face library name and then click Save. System successfully saves the face library.

Adding Face Pictures

You can add face pictures to the existing libraries one by one or by batch, or add from the detected faces.

To add face pictures one by one or by batch, you need to get the pictures from the USB storage device. The picture size should be smaller than 256K with resolution between 200×200–6000×5000.

Adding One Face Picture

You can add one face picture to the database. It is for the scenario that the registered human face picture amount is small.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > DATABASE > FACE LIBRARY.

The FACE LIBRARY interface is displayed.

Step 2 Click of the library that you want to configure. The Details interface is displayed. See Figure 4-155.

Figure 4-155

Details Name Gender All ID No. Modeli... All Reset Search Register ID Batch re... Modeling Delete All 1/ 1 1 Options

Step 3 Click Register ID.

The Register ID interface is displayed. See Figure 4-156.

Figure 4-156

Register ID Name Gender Male Female Birthday Year Month Date Address ID Type ID No. Country Add More OK Reset Cancel

Step 4 Click to add a face picture.

The Browse interface is displayed. See Figure 4-157.

Figure 4-157

Browse Device Name sdb1(USB USB) Refresh Total Space 14.93 GB Free Space 14.92 GB Address Name Size Type Delete XVR Folder OK Back

Step 5 Select a face picture and enter the registration information. See Figure 4-158.

Figure 4-158

Register ID Name margie Gender Male Female Birthday 1996 03 07 Address TTYUI ID Type Passport ID No. 11111111111111155555 Country United States Add More OK Reset Cancel

Step 6 Click OK.

The system prompts the registration is successful.

Step 7 On the Details interface, click Search.

The system prompts modeling is successful. See Figure 4-159.

If the system prompts the message indicating modeling is in process, wait a while and then click Search again. If modeling is failed, the registered face picture cannot be used for face recognition.

Figure 4-159

Details Name Gender All ID No. Modeli... All Reset Search Register ID Batch re... Modeling Delete All Name: nic Name: mangie Gender: Male Gender: Female ID No. ID No. 11111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111110000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Modeling Successful Modeling Successful

Adding Face Pictures in Batch

System supports batch add if you want to import several human face image at the same time.

Step 1 Give a name to the face picture by referring to the following table. See Table 4-43.

Table 4-43

Naming format	Description
Name	Enter the name.
Gender	Enter 1 or 2. 1 represents male, and 2 represents female.
Birthday	Enter numbers in the format of yyyy-mm-dd.
Country	Enter the abbreviation of country. For example, CN for China.
ID Type	1 represents ID card; 2 represents passport; 3 represents military officer password.
ID No.	Enter the ID number.
Address	Enter the address.

Step 2 Select Main Menu > AI > DATABASE > FACE LIBRARY.

The FACE LIBRARY interface is displayed.

Step 3 Click of the library that you want to configure. The Details interface is displayed. See Figure 4-155.

Step 4 On the Details interface, click Batch register. The Batch register interface is displayed. See Figure 4-160.

Figure 4-160

Batch register Select file, max. select 500 each ... Select a folder The image format shall be .jpg Naming format: Name#SGender#BBirthday#NCountry#TID Type#MID No.# AAddress.jpg(Name required, others optional) e.g. Tom#S1#B19900101#NUS#T1#M123456789#ANorth Main Street.jpg Gender: 1.Male 2.Female ID Type: 1.ID Card 2.Passport 3.Military Officer Passport Cancel

Step 5 Click Select file, max select 500 each time or Select a folder to import face pictures.

Step 6 Click OK to complete batch registration.

4.7.3.2 Black/whitelist

To manage vehicle management, you can add the corresponding plate number on the blacklist or whitelist. System can compare the detected plate information with the plate on the

blacklist/whitelist and then trigger the corresponding alarm linkage.

After enable black/whitelist, on the preview interface, the plate in the blacklist is displayed as red on the plate list, the plate in the whitelist is displayed as green on the plate list. For the plate not in the black/whitelist, the plate is displayed as white.

Adding B/W List

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AI > DATABASE > B/WLIST. The B/W List interface is displayed. See Figure 4-161.

Figure 4-161

Plate No. Type Whitelist Add Search 0 Plate No. Type Del Import Export < 1/1 > Guide 1 Page(s) Delete Clear

Step 2 Set plate information and then select Blacklist or Whitelist.

Step 3 Click Add.

Deleting Black/Whitelist

Set type as Whitelist, Blacklist, or All, and then click Search. System displays black/whitelist information. See Figure 4-162.

• On the searched results list, check the box before the plate number and then click Delete, or click the of the corresponding plate number, you can delete the plate information on the black/whitelist.

- Click Clear to delete all plate information on the black/whitelist.

Figure 4-162

Static No Type StaticNo Add Search No Add Static No Type Delete 0 0 Finish is run data Import Export Exit Cancel

Import/Export Black/whitelist

System supports export black/whitelist to the USB device, or import black/whitelist from the USB device. System supports .csv or .xlsx file. The export file format is .csv.

• Import black/whitelist: Click Import and then select the corresponding file, click Browse to import the file.
• Export black/whitelist: Click Export and then select the file storage path and then click Save.

4.8 Event Manager

4.8.1 Alarm Info

You can search, view and back up the alarm information.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > ALARM INFO.

The ALARM INFO interface is displayed. See Figure 4-163.

Figure 4-163

Type All Start Time 2000 -01 -01 00 :00 :00 End Time 2000 -01 -02 00 :00 :00 Search 100 Log Time Event Playback 1 2000-01-01 20:59:48 Illegal Login :<172.12.12.221,admin> 2 2000-01-01 20:43:25 Illegal Login :<172.12.12.221,admin> 3 2000-01-01 19:22:27 Illegal Login :<172.12.12.221,admin> 4 2000-01-01 15:58:59 Illegal Login :<172.12.12.221,admin> 5 2000-01-01 15:42:35 Illegal Login :<172.12.12.221,admin> 6 2000-01-01 14:26:13 Illegal Login :<172.12.12.221,admin> 7 2000-01-01 14:09:54 Illegal Login :<172.12.12.221,admin> 8 2000-01-01 12:55:49 Illegal Login :<172.12.12.221,admin> 9 2000-01-01 05:50:38 10 2000-01-01 05:50:38 11 2000-01-01 05:50:38 12 2000-01-01 05:50:38 13 2000-01-01 05:50:36 14 2000-01-01 05:50:36 15 2006-01-01 05:50:36 < 1/9 > Go To 1 Backup Details

Step 4 In the Type list, select the event type; In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the specific time.

Step 5 Click Search.

The search results are displayed.

Step 6 Click Backup to back up the search results into the external storage device.

NOTE

• Select an alarm event log and then click Backup to back up it to peripheral USB device.
• Select an alarm event log, click to play the recorded video of alarm event. Double-click a log or click Details to view the detailed information of the event.

4.8.2 Alarm Status

You can view NVR alarm event, and remote channel alarm event.

Select Main Menu > ALARM > ALARM STATUS, the ALARM STATUS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-164.

Figure 4-164

Alarm Type Net Disconnection Net Disconnect Alarm Status

4.8.3 Alarm Input

Step 1 Select Main menu > ALARM > ALARM INPUT,

The ALARM INPUT interface is displayed. See Figure 4-165.

Step 2 There are four alarm types.

• Local alarm: After connect the alarm device to the NVR alarm input port, system can trigger the corresponding alarm operations when there is alarm signal from the alarm input port to the NVR.
  ● Network alarm: NVR trigger corresponding alarm operations when it receives the alarm signal via the network transmission.
• IPC external alarm: When the network camera connected peripheral device has triggered an alarm, it can upload the alarm signal to the NVR via the network transmission. The system can trigger the corresponding alarm operations.
• IPC offline alarm: When the network connection between the NVR and the network camera is off, the system can trigger the corresponding alarm operations.

Figure 4-165

Local Net IPC Ext IPC Offline Alarm In 1 Alarm Name Alarm In1 Enable Type NO Period Setting Anti-Dither 5 s Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting Post-Record 10 s PTZ Activation Setting Tour Setting Picture Storage Setting Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Apply Back

Step 3 Set Alarm In channel number and then select the Enable check box to enable the function.

Step 4 Configure parameters. See Table 4-44.

Step 5 Click Apply.
Table 4-44

Parameter	Description
Alarm in	Select a channel to set alarm.
Enable	Check the box to enable the function.
Alarm Name	Enter an alarm name.
Type	NO (normal open) or NC (normal close).
Period	Define a period during which the alarm is active. For details, see "Setting Period in 4.8.5.1 Motion Detect."
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message	Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel for recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and clickSettingto select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Snapshot	Select theSnapshotcheck box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.To use this function, selectMain Menu >CAMERA >ENCODE >Snapshot, in the Mode list, select Event (Trigger).
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
VoicePrompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.[IMAGE]Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

4.8.4 Alarm Control

You can set proper alarm output (Auto/manual/off). Connect the alarm device to the system alarm output port, and set the mode as auto, system can trigger the corresponding operations when an alarm occurs.

● Auto: Once an alarm event occurs, system can generate an alarm.
● Manual: Alarm device is always on the alarming mode.
- Off: Disable alarm output function.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > ALARM OUTPUT.

The ALARM OUTPUT interface is displayed. See Figure 4-166.

Figure 4-166

General Alarm Alarm Type All 1 2 3 4 5 6 Auto Manual Off Status Alarm Release OK Apply Back

Step 2 Select the alarm mode of the alarm output channel.

• Click OK button of the Alarm Release, you can clear all alarm output statuses.
  • View the alarm output status on the Status column.

Step 3 Click Apply.

4.8.5 Video Detection

The video detection adopts the computer image and graphics process technology. It can analyze the video and check there is considerable changing or not. Once video has changed considerably (such as there is any moving object, video is distorted), system can trigger the corresponding alarm activation operations.

Select Main menu > ALARM > VIDEO DETECTION >MOTION DETECT, you can see motion detect interface. See Figure 4-169. There are five detection types: motion detection, video loss, tampering, scene changing and PIR alarm.

4.8.5.1 Motion Detect

When the moving object appears and moves fast enough to reach the preset sensitivity value, the system activates the alarm.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > VIDIEO DETECTION > Motion Detect.

The Motion Detect interface is displayed. See Figure 4-167.

Figure 4-167

Motion Detect Video Loss Tampering Scene Change PIR Alarm Channel D1 Region Setting Enable MD Period Setting Anti-Dither 5 s Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting Post-Record 10 s PTZ Activation Setting Tour Setting Picture Storage Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Copy Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the motion detection parameters. See Table 4-45.

Table 4-45

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select a channel to set the motion detection.
Region	Click Setting to define the motion detection region.
Enable MD	Enable or disable the motion detection function. Check the box to enable the function.
Period	Define a period during which the motion detection is active.
Sensitivity	The higher the value is, the easier it is to trigger an alarm. But at the same time, the false alarm may occur. The default value is recommended.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message	Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel for recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and click Setting to select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Snapshot	Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > ENCODE > Snapshot, in the Mode list, select Event (Trigger).
Voice Prompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

• Click Default to restore the default setting.
• Click Copy, in the Copy dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.
• Click Test to test the settings.

Setting the Motion Detection Region

Step 1 Next to Region, click Setting.

The region setting screen is displayed.

Step 2 Point to the middle top of the interface.

The setting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-168.

Figure 4-168

Name MyMotionDetectorRule Sensitivity + 60 Threshold + 1

Step 3 Configure the regions settings. You can configure totally four regions.

1) Select one region, for example, click

2) Drag on the screen to select the region that you want to detect.
3) The selected area shows the color that represents the region.
4) Configure the parameters. See Table 4-46.

Table 4-46

Parameter	Description
Name	Enter a name for the region.
Sensitivity	Every region of every channel has an individual sensitivity value.The bigger the value is, the easier the alarms can be activated.
Threshold	Adjust the threshold for motion detect. Every region of every channel has an individual threshold.

When anyone of the four regions activates motion detect alarm, the channel where this region belongs to will activate motion detect alarm.

Step 4 Right-click on the screen to exit the region setting interface.

Step 5 On the Motion Detect interface, click Apply to complete the settings.

Setting Period

The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.

Step 1 Next to Period, click Setting.

The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 4-169.

Figure 4-169

Setting All 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Default OK Back

Step 2 Define the motion detection period. By default, it is active all the time.

- Define the period by drawing.

☐ Define for a specified day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks to select the active period.

Define for several days of a week: Click before each day, the icon switches to On the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days with will take the same settings.

Define for all days of a week: Click All, all switches to On the timeline of any day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days will take the same settings.

- Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.

1) Click .

The Period interface is displayed. See Figure 4-170.

Figure 4-170

Period Current Date: Sunday Period 1 00:00 - 24:00 Period 2 00:00 - 24:00 Period 3 00:00 - 24:00 Period 4 00:00 - 24:00 Period 5 00:00 - 24:00 Period 6 00:00 - 24:00 Copy All Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday OK Back

2) Enter the time frame for the period, and then select the check box to enable the settings.

◇ There are six periods for you to set for each day.
Under Copy, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.

3) Click OK to save the settings.

Step 3 On the Motion Detect interface, click Apply to complete the settings.

4.8.5.2 Tampering

When the camera lens is covered, or the video is displayed in a single color because of sunlight status, the monitoring cannot be continued normally. To avoid such situations, you can configure the tampering alarm settings.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > VIDIEO DETECTION > Tampering.

The Tampering interface is displayed. See Figure 4-171.

Figure 4-171

Motion Detect Video Loss Tampering Scene Change PIR Alarm Channel D1 Enable MD Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 s Tour Setting Picture Storage Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Copy Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 To configure the settings for the tampering detection parameters, see "4.8.5.1 Motion Detect."

The Tampering function does not have region and sensitivity items.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

• Click Default to restore the default setting.
• Click Copy, in the Copy dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

4.8.5.3 Video Loss

When the video loss occurs, the system activates the alarm.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > VIDIEO DETECTION > Video Loss. The Video Loss interface is displayed. See Figure 4-172.

Figure 4-172

Motion Detect Video Loss Tampering Diagnosis Channel 1 Enable Period Setting CAM AntiDither 0 Sec. Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 Sec. Show Message ✓ Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PTZ Setting Post Record 10 Sec. Tour 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Snapshot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Buzzer ✓ Log Voice Prompts None Default Copy Apply Back

Step 2 To configure the settings for the video loss detection parameters, see "4.8.5.1 Motion Detect."

The video loss function does not have region and sensitivity items.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

• Click Default to restore the default setting.
• Click Copy, in the Copy dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

4.8.5.4 Scene Change

When the detected scene has changed, system can generate an alarm.

Step 1 Select Main Menu>ALARM>VIDEO DETECTION>SCENE CHANGE, The Scene Change interface is displayed. See Figure 4-173.

Figure 4-173

Motion Detect Video Loss Tampering Scene Change PIR Alarm Channel D1 Enable MD Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 s Tour Setting Picture Storage Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 To configure the settings for the scene change parameters, see "4.8.5.1 Motion Detect." The scene change function does not have region and sensitivity items.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

• Click Default to restore the default setting.
• Click Copy, in the Copy dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

4.8.5.5 PIR Alarm

When the detected scene has changed, system can generate an alarm.

PIR function helps enhancing the accuracy and validity of motion detect. It can filter the meaningless alarms that are activated by the objects such as falling leaves, flies. The detection range by PIR is smaller than the field angle.

PIR function is enabled by default if it is supported by the cameras. Enabling PIR function will get the motion detect to be enabled automatically to generate motion detection alarms; if the PIR function is not enabled, the motion detect just has the general effect.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > VIDEO DETECT > PIR ALARM.

The PIR Alarm interface is displayed. See Figure 4-174.

Figure 4-174

Motion Detect Video Loss Tampering Scene Change PIR Alarm Channel D1 Region Setting Enable MD Period Setting Anti-Dither 0 s Alarm Out Setting Latch 0 s Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting Post-Record 10 s PTZ Activation Setting Tour Setting Picture Storage Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Copy Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 To configure the settings for the PIR alarm parameters, see "4.8.5.1 Motion Detect."

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

• Click Default to restore the default setting.
• Click Copy, in the Copy dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

4.8.6 Audio Detect

System can generate an alarm once it detect the audio is not clear, the tone color has changed or there is abnormal or audio volume changes.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > AUDIO DETECT.

The AUDIO DETECT interface is displayed. See Figure 4-175.

Figure 4-175

Channel D1 Input Abnormal Intensity Change Sensitivity - + 1(1 - 100) Threshold - + 1(1 - 100) Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 s Tour Setting Picture Storage Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Default Refresh Apply Back

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-47.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Table 4-47

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select a channel to set.
Input abnormal	Check the box here, system can generate an alarm once the audio input is abnormal.
Intensity change	Check the box here, system can generate an alarm once the audio volume becomes strong.
Period	Define a period during which the function is active.
Sensitivity	The higher the value is, the easier it is to trigger an alarm. But at the same time, the false alarm may occur. The default value is recommended.
Threshold	You can set intensity change threshold. The smaller the value is, the higher th sensitivity is.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message	Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel for recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and clickSettingto select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Snapshot	Select theSnapshotcheck box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.To use this function, selectMain Menu>CAMERA>ENCODE>Snapshot, in the Mode list, select Event (Trigger).
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
VoicePrompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.[IMAGE]Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

4.8.7 Thermal Alarm

System supports thermal devices and receives the alarm signal from it. It can recognize the alarm type, and then trigger the corresponding alarm actions.

The system supports fire alarm, temperature (temperature difference) and cold/hot alarm.

• Fire alarm: System generates an alarm once it detects there is a fire. The alarm mode includes Preset and Excluded zone.
• Temperature (temperature difference): System triggers an alarm once the temperature difference between two positions is higher or below the specified threshold.
• Clod/hot alarm: System triggers an alarm once the detected position temperature is higher or below the specified threshold.

- The connected channel shall support temperature test function.

- This function is for some series products only. It supports enable/disable function only. Go to the front-end device to set corresponding parameters.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ALARM > THERMAL ALARM.

The THERMAL ALARM interface is displayed. See Figure 4-176.

Figure 4-176

Channel D1 Alarm Type Smog Alarm Period Setting Alarm Out Setting Latch 0 Sec. Alarm Upload Send Email Record Channel Setting PTZ Activation Setting Post-Record 10 Sec. Tour Setting Picture Storage Buzzer Log Voice Prompts Default Apply Back

Step 2 Select a channel and alarm type, enable the thermal alarm function.

Step 3 Select fire mode and then enable this function (If the alarm type is Fire Alarm). System supports preset mode and zone excluded mode.

• Preset: Select a preset and then enable the function. System generates an alarm once it detect there is a fire.
• Global: System filters the specified high temperature zone. System generates an alarm once the rest zone has fire.

Step 4 Set parameters. See Table 4-48.

Step 5 Click Apply.
Table 4-48

Parameter	Description
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message	Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
AlarmUpload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel for recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and clickSettingto select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Snapshot	Select theSnapshotcheck box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.To use this function, selectMain Menu>CAMERA>ENCODE>Snapshot, in the Mode list, select Event (Trigger).
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
VoicePrompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.[IMAGE]Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

4.8.8 Abnormality

Step 1 Select Main Menu>ALARM>ABNORMALITY.

The Abnormality interface is displayed. See Figure 4-177.

Figure 4-177

HDD Network User Device Event Type No HDD Enable Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Alarm Upload Send Email Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Apply Back

Figure 4-178

HDD Network User Device Event Type Net Disconnection Enable Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Apply Back

Figure 4-179

HDD Network User Device Event Type Illegal Login Attempt(s) 5 Enable Lock Time 5 Min. Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Buzzer Log Send Email Voice Prompts None Apply Back

Figure 4-180

HDD Network User Device Event Type Fan Speed Abnormal Enable Alarm Out Setting Latch 10 s Show Message Send Email Buzzer Log Voice Prompts None Apply Back

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-49.

Step 3 Click Apply.
Table 4-49

Parameter	Description
Event Type	Click the corresponding tab to set different abnormality events.HDD: Sets process method when there is a HDD event such as HDD error, no HDD, no space. See Figure 4-177.Network: Sets process method when there is a network event such as disconnection, IP conflict, MAC conflict. See Figure 4-178.User: Sets process method when there is an Illegal login event. See Figure 4-179.Device: Sets process method when fan speed is abnormal, or there is a network security event. See Figure 4-180.Different series products support different event types. The actual product shall prevail.
Enable	Check the box to enable the function,
Less than	System generates an alarm once the HDD space is less than the threshold.For HDD Spacetype only.
Attempts	Set the maximum number of allowable wrong password entries. The account will be locked after your entries exceed the maximum numberFor Illegal Login type only.
Lock Time	Set how long the account is locked for. The value ranges from 1 minute to 60 minutes.For Illegal Login type only.
Alarm Out	The alarm device (such as lights, sirens, etc.) is connected to the alarm output port. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device transmits the alarm information to the alarm device.
Latch	When the alarm ends, the alarm extended for a period of time. The time range is from 0 seconds to 300 seconds.
Show Message	Check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Alarm Upload	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device uploads an alarm signal to the network (including the alarm center).This function is for some series products only.You need to set the alarm center first. For details, see "4.12.9 Alarm Centre."
Send Email	Select the check box. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device sends an email to the set mailbox to notify the user.You need to set the email first. For details, see "4.12.6 Email."
Record Channel	Select the check box and select the needed recording channel (support multiple choices). When an alarm occurs, the NVR device activates the channel fo recording.You need to enable intelligent recording and auto recording first. For details, see "4.1.4.6 Schedule."
PTZ Activation	Select the check box and clickSettingto select the channel and PTZ action. When an alarm occurs, the NVR device associates the channel to perform the corresponding PTZ action. For example, activate the PTZ in channel one to turn to the preset point X.Tripwire alarm supports to activate PTZ preset point only.You need to set the corresponding PTZ actions first, see "4.4.3 Configuring PTZ Functions."
Delay	At the end of the alarm, the recording extends for a period of time. The time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds.
Tour	Select the check box and select the channel for tour. When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR device displays the selected channel screen.You need to set the time interval and mode for tour first, see "4.16.2 Tour."After the tour is over, the preview interface is restored to the screen split mode before the tour.
Snapshot	Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.To use this function, select Main Menu > CAMERA > ENCODE > Snapshot, in the Mode list, select Event (Trigger).
Log	Select the check box, the NVR device records the alarm information in the log when an alarm occurs.
VoicePrompts	Check the box and then select the corresponding audio file from the dropdown list. System plays the audio file when the alarm occurs.Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage" to add audio file first.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

4.9 POS

You can connect the Device to the POS (Point of Sale) machine and receive the information from it. This function applies to the scenarios such as supermarket POS machine. After connection is established, the Device can access the POS information and display the overlaid text in the channel window.

Playing POS information in the local playback and viewing the POS information in the live view screen support single-channel mode and four-channel mode. Displaying monitoring screen and playing back in the web support multi-channel mode.

4.9.1 Search

The system supports fuzzy search.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > POS > POS SEARCH.

The POS SEARCH interface is displayed. See Figure 4-181.

Figure 4-181

POS Info Search Channel 1 Start Time 2000 -01 -01 00:00:00 End Time 2000 -01 -02 00:00:00 0 Transaction Time Channel Play 0/0 0 50:10

Step 2 In the POS SEARCH box, enter the information such as transaction number on your receipt, amount, or product name.

Step 4 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period that you want to search the POS transaction information.

Step 5 Click Search. The searched transaction results display in the table.

4.9.2 Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu > POS > POS SETUP. The POS SETUP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-182.

Figure 4-182

POS Name pos1 Enable Record Channel Privacy Protocol General Connect Type TCP Convert Unicode(UTF-8) Overlay Page Network Overtime 100 s Time Display 120 s Font Size Medium Font Color POS Info Line Delimiter Default Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the POS parameters. See Table 4-50.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
4.9.2.1 Privacy Setup
Table 4-50
Step 1 Click Setup

Parameter	Description
POS Name	In the POS Name list, select the POS machine that you want to igures settings for. Click to modify the POS name.The POS name shall be unique.The POS name supports 21 Chinese characters or 63 English characters.
Enable	Enable the POS function.
Record CH	Click select a channel to record.
Privacy Setup	Enter the privacy contents. Refer to "4.9.2.1 Privacy Setup".
Protocol Type	Select POS by default. Different machine corresponds to different protocol.
Connect Type	In the Connect Type list, select the connection protocol type.Click in the IP Address interface is displayed.In the Source IP box, enter the IP address (the machine that is connected to the Device) that sends messages.
Convert	Select a character encoding mode.
Overlay	In the Overlay list, Select Turn or ROLL.Turn: Once the information is at 16 lines, system displays the next page.ROLL: Once the information is at 16 lines, system rolls one line after another to delete the first line.When the local preview mode is in 4-split, the turn/ROLL function is based on 8 lines.
Network time out	When the network is not working correctly and cannot be recovered after the entered timeout limit, the POS information will not display normally. After the network is recovered, the latest POS information will be displayed.
Time Display	Enter the time that how long you want to keep the POS information displaying. For example, enter 5, the POS information disappear from the screen after 5 seconds.
Font Size	In the Font Size list, select Small, Medium, or Big as the text size of POS information
COLOR	In the color bar, click to select the color for the text size of POS information.
POS Info	Enable the POS Info function, the POS information displays in the live view/WEB.
Line Delimiter	There is no line delimiter by default.After set the line delimiter (HEX), the overlay information after the delimiter is displayed in the new line. For example, the line delimiter is F and the overlay information is 123156789, NVR displays overlay information on the local preview interface and Web as:1236789

The Privacy interface is displayed. See Figure 4-183.

Figure 4-183

Privacy Privacy1 Privacy2 Privacy3 OK Back

Step 2 Set privacy information.

Step 3 Click OK button.

4.9.2.2 Connection type

- Connection type is UDP or TCP.

Step 1 Select Connect Type as UDP, TCP_CLINET or TCP.

Step 2 Click

The IP Address interface is displayed. See Figure 4-184.

Figure 4-184

IP Address Source IP 192 . 168 . 0 . 1 37777 Destination IP 172 . 12 . 70 . 67 Port 38800 OK Back

Step 3 Source IP and Port. Refers to POS IP address and port.

Step 4 Click OK to complete setup.

4.10 Operation and Maintenance

4.10.1 Log

You can view and search the log information, or backup log to the USB device.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > OPERATION > LOG.

The LOG interface is displayed. See Figure 4-185.

Figure 4-185

Type All Start Time 2000 -01 -01 00 :00 :00 End Time 2000 -01 -02 00 :00 :00 Search 64 Log Time Event 1 2000-01-01 71:08:54 System Upgrade:Start Upgrade 2 2000-01-01 20:59:48 titles.loginFailure 3 2000-01-01 20:57:50 Change Working HDD to 5 2000-01-01 19:51:13 User logged out(Local> 6 2000-01-01 19:34:27 User logged in(Local> 7 2000-01-01 19:34:27 User logged in(Local> 8 2000-01-01 19:22:27 titles.loginFailure 9 2000-01-01 17:32:41 Change Working HDD to 11 2000-01-01 15:44:33 Change Working HDD to 13 2000-01-01 14:26:13 titles.loginFailure 14 2000-01-01 14:09:54 titles.loginFailure 15 2000-01-01 12:57:36 System Upgrade:Start Upgrade I/1 Backup Details Clear

Step 5 In the Type list, select the log type that you want to view (System, Config, Storage, Record, Account, Clear, Playback, and Connection) or select All to view all logs.

Step 6 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period to search, and then click Search.

The search results are displayed. See Figure 4-186.

Figure 4-186

Type All Start Time 2018-01-30 00:00:00 End Time 2018-01-31 00:00:00 39 Log Time Event 25 2018-01-30 14:51:11 Save config! 26 2018-01-30 14:51:21 HDD Amount<1>, Current Working HDD... 27 2018-01-30 14:51:22 Save config! 28 2018-01-30 14:51:22 Save config! 29 2018-01-30 14:51:31 Save config! 30 2018-01-30 14:51:56 S.M.A.R.T INFO 31 2018-01-30 14:51:56 S.M.A.R.T INFO 32 2018-01-30 14:52:31 Add Group 33 2018-01-30 14:52:31 Add Group 34 2018-01-30 14:52:31 Add User 35 2018-01-30 14:52:31 User logged in 36 2018-01-30 14:52:35 Save config! 37 2018-01-30 14:52:36 Save config! 38 2018-01-30 14:52:39 Save config! 39 2018-01-30 14:53:10 User logged in Search 1/1 Backup Details Clear

- Click Details or double-click the log that you want to view, the Detailed Information interface is displayed. Click Next or Previous to view more log information.

• Click Backup to back up the logs into the USB storage device.
• Click Clear to remove all logs.

4.10.2 System

4.10.2.1 Version

Select Main Menu > SYSTEM > VERSION, you can go to VERSION interface.

You can view NVR version information. Slight different may be found on the user interface.

4.10.2.2 HDD Info

You can view the HDD quantity, HDD type, total space, free space, status, and S.M.A.R.T information.

Select Main Menu > OPERATION > INFOMATION > HDD, the HDD interface is displayed. See Figure 4-187. Refer to Table 4-51 for detailed information.

Figure 4-187

VERSION HDD BPS STATUS HDD Health Det... 1* Device Name Physical Position Type Total Space Free Space All 2.72 TB 2.01 TB 1* sda main board-3 Read/Write 2.72 TB 2.01 TB

Table 4-51

Parameter	Description
No.	Indicates the number of the currently connected HDD. The asterisk (*) means the current working HDD.
Device Name	Indicates name of HDD.
Physical Position	Indicates installation position of HDD.
Type	Indicates HDD type.
Total Space	● Indicates the total capacity of HDD.
Free Space	Indicates the usable capacity of HDD.
Status	Indicates the status of the HDD to show if it is working normally.
S.M.A.R.T	View the S.M.A.R.T reports from HDD detecting.

4.10.2.3 BPS

Here is for you to view current video bit rate (kb/s) and resolution.

Select Main Menu > OPERATION > INFOMATION > BPS, the BPS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-188.

Figure 4-188

4.10.2.4 Device Status

You can view fan running status such as speed, CPU temperature, and memory.

Select Main Menu > OPERATION > INFOMATION > Status, the Status interface is displayed. See Figure 4-189.

Figure 4-189

VERSION HDD BPS STATUS HDD Health Det... Fan Speed Self-ada... 3120 CPU CPU Temper... Normal 50 °C Memory 6% 59% Power

4.10.2.5 HDD Health Detection

You can view HDD health status. System supports Seagate SKYHAWK series 4T and higher HDD. It displays HDD name, space, manufacturer, Serial No., and health status.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > OPERATION > INFOMATION > HDD Health Detection. The HDD Health Detection interface is displayed. See Figure 4-190.

Figure 4-190

VERSION HDD BPS STATUS HDD Health Det... HDD State All Support Seagate Skyhawk 4T or above. Name HDD Space Manufact... Serial No. Health status Manual Check

Step 2 Double-click the HDD in the list, system displays the detection report.

Step 3 Select an item in the list, system displays the corresponding report. System displays the curve report of the recent week by default.

4.10.3 Network

4.10.3.1 Online User

You can view the online user information or block any user for a period of time. To block an

online user, click and then enter the time that you want to block this user. The maximum value you can set is 65535.

The system detects every 5 seconds to check whether there is any user added or deleted, and update the user list timely.

Select Main Menu > OPERATION > NETWORK > ONLINE USERS, the Online Users interface is displayed. See Figure 4-191.

Figure 4-191

ONLINE USERS LOAD TEST Username IP User Login Time Block admin 10.33.12.132 2019-06-03 13:57:55 Block 60 s

4.10.3.2 Network Load

Network load means the data flow which measures the transmission capability. You can view the information such as data receiving speed and sending speed.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > INFO > NETWORK > LOAD.

The LOAD interface is displayed. See Figure 4-192.

Figure 4-192

Step 2 Click the LAN name that you want to view, for example, LAN1.

The system displays the information of data sending speed and receiving speed.

• System displays LAN1 load by default.
• Only one LAN load can be displayed at one time.

4.10.3.3 Network Test

You can test the network connection status between the Device and other devices.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > INFO > NETWORK > TEST.

The TEST interface is displayed. See Figure 4-193.

Figure 4-193

ONLINE USERS LOAD TEST Network Test Destination IP Test Test Result Network Sniffer Packet Backup Device Name Refresh Address / Browse Name IP Sniffer Packet Size Sniffer Packet Backup LAN1 172.12.70.67 0KB

Step 2 In the Destination IP box, enter the IP address.
Step 3 Click Test.

After testing is completed, the test result is displayed. You can check the evaluation for average delay, packet loss, and network status.

4.10.4 Maintenance and Management

4.10.4.1 Device Maintenance

When the Device has been running for a long time, you can configure the auto reboot when the Device is not working. You can also configure the case fan mode to reduce noise and extend the service life.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > OPERATION > SYSTEM MAINTAIN > AUTO MAINTAIN.

The AUTO MAINTAIN interface is displayed. See Figure 4-194.

Figure 4-194

AUTO MAINTEN... IMP/EXP DEFAULT UPGRADE Auto Reboot Never Case Fan Mode Always run Apply Back

Step 4 Configure the settings for the system maintenance parameters. See Table 4-52.

Table 4-52

Parameter	Description
Auto Reboot	In theAuto Rebootlist, select the reboot time.
Case Fan Mode	In theCase Fan Modelist, you can selectAlways run or Auto. If you selectAuto, the case fan will stop or start according to the external conditions such as the Device temperature.This function is for some series products only., and it is only supported on the local configuration interface.

Step 5 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.10.4.2 IMP/EXP

You can export or import the Device system settings if there are several Devices that require the same setup.

- The IMP/EXP interface cannot be opened if the backup operation is ongoing on the other interfaces.

• When you open the IMP/EXP interface, the system refreshes the devices and sets the current directory as the first root directory.
• Click Format to format the USB storage device.

Exporting System Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu > OPERATION > SYSTEM MAITAIN > IMP/EXP.

The IMP/EXP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-195.

Figure 4-195

AUTO MAINTEN... IMP/EXP DEFAULT UPGRADE Device Name Refresh Format Total Space Free Space Address Name Size Type Delete New Folder Import Export

Step 2 Insert a USB storage device into one of the USB ports on the Device.

Step 3 Click Refresh to refresh the interface.

The connected USB storage device is displayed. See Figure 4-196.

Figure 4-196

AUTO MAINTEN... IMP/EXP DEFAULT UPGRADE Device Name sda1(USB USB) Refresh Format Total Space 14.83 GB Free Space 1.37 GB Address / Name Size Type Delete ...Trashes 4.0 KB File IVSS Folder New Folder Import Export

Step 4 Click Export.

There is a folder under the name style of "Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]". Double-click this folder to view the backup files.

4.10.4.3 Default

This function is for admin account only.

You can select the settings that you want to restore to the factory default.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > OPERATION > SYSTEM MAITAIN > DEFAULT.

The DEFAULT interface is displayed. See Figure 4-197.

Figure 4-197

AUTO MAINTEN... IMP/EXP DEFAULT UPGRADE Please select setting entries that you want to default. ✓ All ✓ CAMERA ✓ EVENT ✓ SYSTEM ✓ NETWORK ✓ STORAGE Factory Default Apply Back

Step 2 Restore the settings.

• Select the settings that you want to restore, and then click Apply. The system starts restoring the selected settings.
• Click Factory Default, and then click OK. The system starts restoring the whole settings.

4.10.4.4 System Update

4.10.4.4.1 Upgrading File

Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the Device.

Step 2 Select Main Menu > OPERATION > SYSTEM MAINTAIN > UPGRADE.

The UPGRADE interface is displayed. See Figure 4-198.

Figure 4-198

AUTO MAINTEN... IMP/EXP DEFAULT UPGRADE File Upgrade If you need to upgrade system now,please insert USB,then press the start button to start upgrade.Don't shut down the power during upgrade! System Upgrade Online Upgrade Auto-check for updates System Version 4.000.0000000.0 Build Date 2019-05-28 Manual Check It is the latest version

Step 3 Click System Upgrade.

The System Upgrade interface is displayed. See Figure 4-199.

Figure 4-199

System Upgrade Device Name sdb5(USB DISK) Refresh Total Space 15.60 GB Free Space 15.60 GB Address // Name Size Type Delete IP Folder # RemoteConfig_20171103141044.csv 464 B File # printf_20171105172349.txt 451.3 KB File # kmsg_printf_20171105172349.txt 14.9 KB File # LAN1-20171107135215 pcap 1.18 MB File # Update File Start Back

Step 4 Click the file that you want to upgrade.

The selected file is displayed in the Update File box.

Step 5 Click Start.

4.10.4.4.2 Online Upgrade

When the Device is connected to Internet, you can use online upgrade function to upgrade the system.

Before using this function, you need to check whether there is any new version by auto check or manual check.

● Auto check: The Device checks if there is any new version available at intervals.
- Manual check: Perform real-time check whether there is any new version available.

Ensure the correct power supply and network connection during upgrading; otherwise the upgrading might be failed.

Step 1 Select Main Menu >> OPERATION > SYSTEM MAINTAIN > UPGRADE.

The UPGRADE interface is displayed. See Figure 4-200.

Figure 4-200

AUTO MAINTEN... IMP/EXP DEFAULT UPGRADE File Upgrade If you need to upgrade system now,please insert USB,then press the start button to start upgrade.Don't shut down the power during upgrade! System Upgrade Online Upgrade Auto-check for updates System Version 4.000.0000000.0 Build Date 2019-05-28 Manual Check It is the latest version

Step 2 Check whether there is any new version available.

- Auto-check for updates: Enable Auto-check for updates.

- Manual check: Click Manual Check.

The system starts checking the new versions. After checking is completed, the check result is displayed.

• If the "It is the latest version" text is displayed, you do not need to upgrade.
• If the text indicating there is a new version, go to the step 3.

Step 3 Click Upgrade now to update the system.

4.10.4.4.3 Uboot Upgrading

• Under the root directory in the USB storage device, there must be "u-boot.bin.img" file and "update.img" file saved, and the USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.
• Make sure the USB storage device is inserted; otherwise the upgrading cannot be performed.

When starting the Device, the system automatically check whether there is a USB storage device connected and if there is any upgrade file, and if yes and the check result of the upgrade file is correct, the system will upgrade automatically. The Uboot upgrade can avoid the situation that you have to upgrade through +TFTP when the Device is halted.

4.11 File Backup

You can back up the record file to the UBS device.

Step 1 Connect USB burner, USB device or portable HDD to the device.

Step 2 Select Main menu > BACKUP, the Backup interface is displayed. See Figure 4-201.

Figure 4-201

Device Name sda1(USB USB) Format 1.37 GB/14.83 GB(Free/Total) Path Browse Record C... D1 Type All Main Stream Start Time 2000 -01 -01 00 : 00 : 00 End Time 2000 -01 -01 00 : 02 : 00 File Format DAV Search Clear 0 Channel Type Start Time End Time Size(KB) Play 0.00 KB(Space Needed) Onekey Backup Backup

Step 3 Select backup device and then set channel, file start time and end time.

Step 4 Click Search button, system begins search. All matched files are listed below. System automatically calculates the capacity needed and remained.

Step 5 System only backup files with a √ before channel name. You can use Fn or cancel button to delete √ after file serial number.

Step 6 Click backup button, you can backup selected files. There is a process bar for you reference.

Step 7 When the system completes backup, you can see a dialogue box prompting successful backup.

Step 8 Click Backup button, system begins burning. At the same time, the Backup button becomes Stop button. You can view the remaining time and process bar at the left bottom.

• During backup process, you can click ESC to exit current interface for other operation (For some series product only). The system will not terminate backup process. (This function is for some series products only.)
• System pops up corresponding dialogue box if there is no backup device, or no backup file, or error occurs during backup process.
• The file name format usually is: Channel number+Record type+Time. In the file name, the YDM format is Y+M+D+H+M+S. File extension name is .dav.
• Click Onekey Backup to back up all required files.

4.12 Network

You can set NVR network parameters so that the NVR can communicate with devices in the same LAN.

4.12.1 TCP/IP

Select Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP, the TCP/IP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-202.

Figure 4-202

Ethernet Card IP Address Net Mode NIC Member Edit Unbind Ethernet Port1 172.13.70.3T Single NIC 1 Ethernet Port2 192.18.7.175 Single NIC 2 IP Address: 172.12.70.67 Default Gateway: 172.12.0.1 MTU: 1500 MAC Address: 38:af:29:68:db:d8 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Mode: STATIC IP Version IPv4 DHCP Preferred DNS Alternate DNS Default Card Ethernet Port1

Table 4-53

Parameter	Description
Net Mode	Multi-address: Two Ethernet ports work separately through either of which you can request the Device to provide the services such as HTTP and RTSP. You need to configure a default Ethernet port (usually the Ethernet port 1 by default) to request the services from the device end such as DHCP, Email and FTP. If one of the two Ethernet ports is disconnected as detected by networking testing, the system network status is regarded as offline.Fault Tolerance: Two Ethernet ports share one IP address.Normally only one Ethernet port is working and when this port fails, the other port will start working automatically to ensure the network connection.When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN.Load Balance: Two network cards share one IP address and they are working at the same time to share the network load averagely. If one of them fails, the other can continue working normally.When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN.The Device with single Ethernet port does not support this function.
Default Ethernet Port	In the Ethernet Card list, select an Ethernet port as a default port.This setting is available only when theMulti-addressis selected in the Net Mode list.
IP Version	In theIP Versionlist, you can selectIPv4orIPv6. Both versions are supported for access.
MAC Address	Displays the MAC address of the Device.
DHCP	Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway are not available for configuration once DHCP is enabled.If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will display in theIPAddressbox,Subnet Maskbox andDefault Gatewaybox. If not, all values show 0.0.0.0.If you want manually configure the IP information, disable the DHCP function first.If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DHCP are not available for configuration.
IP Address	Enter the IP address and configure the corresponding subnet mask and default gateway.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway	IP address and default gateway must be in the same network segment.
DNS DHCP	Enable the DHCP function to get the DNS address from router.
Preferred DNS	In thePreferred DNSbox, enter the IP address of DNS.
Alternate DNS	In theAlternate DNSbox, enter the IP address of alternate DNS.
MTU	In theMTUbox, enter a value for network card. The value ranges from 1280 byte through 1500 byte. The default is 1500.The suggested MTU values are as below.1500: The biggest value of Ethernet information package. This value is typically selected if there is no PPPoE or VPN connection, and it is also the default value of some routers, network adapters and switches.1492: Optimized value for PPPoE.1468: Optimized value for DHCP.1450: Optimized value for VPN.
Test	Click Testto test if the entered IP address and gateway are interworking.

4.12.2 Port

You can configure the maximum connection accessing the Device from Client such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone and configure each port settings.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > PORT.

The PORT interface is displayed. See Figure 4-203.

Figure 4-203

Max Connection 128 (0 -128) TCP Port 37777 (1025 - 65535) UDP Port 37778 (1025 - 65535) HTTP Port 80 (1 - 65535) HTTPS Enable HTTPS Port 443 (1 - 65535) RTSP Port 554 (1 - 65535) NTP Server Port 123 (1 - 65535) POS Port 38800 (1025 - 65535)

Step 2 Configure the settings for the connection parameters. See Table 4-54.

The connection parameters except Max Connection cannot take effects until the Device has been restarted.

Table 4-54

Parameter	Description
Max Connection	The allowable maximum clients accessing the Device at the same time, such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone.Select a value between 1 and 128. The default value setting is 128.
TCP Port	The default value setting is 37777. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
UDP Port	The default value setting is 37778. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
HTTP Port	The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.
RTSP Port	The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
POS Port	Data transmission. The value range is from 1 through 65535. The default value is 38800.
HTTPS Enable	Enable HTTPS.
HTTPS Port	HTTPS communication port. The default value setting is 443. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.12.3 PPPoE

PPPoE is another way for the Device to access the network. You can establish network connection by configuring PPPoE settings to give the Device a dynamic IP address in the WAN. To use this function, firstly you need to obtain the user name and password from the Internet Service Provider.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > PPPoE.

The PPPoE interface is displayed. See Figure 4-204.

Figure 4-204

Enable Username Password IP Address 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Apply Back

Step 2 Enable the PPPoE function.

Step 3 In the User Name box and Password box, enter the user name and password accordingly provided by the Internet Service Provider.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

The system pops up a message to indicate the successfully saved. The IP address appears on the PPPoE interface. You can use this IP address to access the Device.

When the PPPoE function is enabled, the IP address on the TCP/IP interface cannot be modified.

4.12.4 DDNS

When the IP address of the Device changes frequently, the DDNS function can dynamically refresh the correspondence between the domain on DNS and the IP address, ensuring you access the Device by using the domain.

Preparations

Ensure the Device supports the DDNS Type and log in the website provided by the DDNS service provider to register the information such as domain from PC located in the WAN.

After you have registered and logged in the DDNS website successfully, you can view the information of all the connected devices under this user name.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > DDNS.

The DDNS interface is displayed. See Figure 4-205.

Figure 4-205

Enable After enabling DDNS function, third-party server may collect your device info. DDNS Type NO-IP DDNS Host IP dynupdate.no-ip.com Domain Name Username Password Interval 1440 Min. Test Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the DDNS parameters. See Table 4-55.

Table 4-55

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the DDNS function.
	After enabling DDNS function, the third-party might collect you Device information.
DDNS Type	Type and address of DDNS service provider.
Host IP	Type: Dyndns DDNS; address: members.dyndns.orgType: NO-IP DDNS; address: dynupdate.no-ip.comType: CN99 DDNS; address: members.3322.org
Domain Name	The domain name for registering on the website of DDNS service provider.
User Name	Enter the user name and password obtained from DDNS service provider. You need to register (including user name and password) on the website of DDNS service provider.
Password
Interval	Enter the amount of time that you want to update the DDNS.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.
Enter the domain name in the browser on your PC, and then press Enter.

If the web interface of the Device is displayed, the configuration is successful. If not, the configuration is failed.

4.12.5 UPnP

You can map the relationship between the LAN and the WAN to access the Device on the LAN through the IP address on the WAN.

Preparations

Login the router to set the WAN port to enable the IP address to connect into the WAN.

Enable the UPnP function at the router.

Connect the Device with the LAN port on the router to connect into the LAN.

Select Main Menu > NETWORK > TCP/IP, configure the IP address into the router IP address range, or enable the DHCP function to obtain an IP address automatically.

Configuration Steps

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > UPnP.

The UPnP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-206.

Figure 4-206

PAT Status Offline LAN IP 0 0 . 0 0 WAN IP 0 0 . 0 0 PAT Table 7 Service Name Protocol Int.Port Ext.Port Edit 1 HTTP TCP 80 80 ✓ 2 TCP TCP 37777 37777 ✓ 3 UDP UDP 37778 37778 ✓ 4 RTSP UDP 554 554 ✓ 5 RTSP TCP 554 554 ✓ 6 SNMP UDP 161 161 ✓ 7 HTTPS TCP 443 443 ✓ Apply Back

Figure 4-207

PORT INFO Service Name HTTP Protocol TCP Int.Port 80 Ext.Port 80 OK Cancel

Step 2 Configure the settings for the UPnP parameters. See Table 4-56.

Table 4-56

Parameter	Description
PAT	Enable the UPnP function.
Status	Indicates the status of UPnP function.Offline: Failed.Online: Succeeded.
LAN IP	Enter IP address of router on the LAN.After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address automatically without performing any configurations.
WAN IP	Enter IP address of router on the WAN.After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address automatically without performing any configurations.
PAT Table	The settings in PAT table correspond to the UPnP PAT table on the router.Service Name: Name of network server.Protocol: Type of protocol.Int. Port: Internal port that is mapped on the Device.Ext. Port: External port that is mapped on the router.To avoid the conflict, when setting the external port, try to use the ports from 1024 through 5000 and avoid popular ports from 1 through 255 and system ports from 256 through 1023.When there are several devices in the LAN, properly arrange the ports mapping to avoid mapping to the same external port.When establishing a mapping relationship, ensure themapping ports are not occupied or limited.The internal and external ports of TCP and UDP must be the same and cannot be modified.Click t dify the external port.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

In the browser, enter http://WAN IP: External IP port. You can visit the LAN Device.

4.12.6 Email

You can configure the email settings to enable the system to send the email as a notification when there is an alarm event occurs.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > EMAIL.

The EMAIL interface is displayed. See Figure 4-208.

Figure 4-208

Enable SMTP Server MailServer Port 25 Username Password Anonymous Receiver Receiver1 Email Address none Sender Subject NVR ALERT Attachment Encryption Type TLS Health Enable Interval 60 Min. Test Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the email parameters. See Table 4-57.

Table 4-57

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the email function.
SMTP Server	Enter the address of SMTP server of sender's email account.
Port	Enter the port value of SMTP server. The default value setting is 25. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
User Name	Enter the user name and password of sender's email account.
Password
Anonymity	If enable the anonymity function, you can login as anonymity.
Mail Receiver	In the Mail Receiver list, select the number of receiver that you want to receive the notification. The Device supports up to three mail receivers.
Email Address	Enter the email address of mail receiver(s).
Sender	Enter the sender's email address. It supports maximum three senders separated by comma.
Title	Enter the email subject.Supports Chinese, English and Arabic numerals. It supports maximum 64 characters.
Attachment	Enable the attachment function. When there is an alarm event, the system can attach snapshots as an attachment to the email.
Authentication	Select the encryption type: NONE, SSL, or TLS.For SMTP server, the default encryption type is TLS.
Interval (Sec.)	This is the interval that the system sends an email for the same type of alarm event, which means, the system does not send an email upon any alarm event.This setting helps to avoid the large amount of emails caused by frequent alarm events.The value ranges from 0 to 3600. 0 means that there is no interval.
Health Enable	Enable the health test function. The system can send a test email to check the connection.
Interval (Min.)	This is the interval that the system sends a health test email.The value ranges from 30 to 1440. 0 means that there is no interval.
Test	Click Test to test the email sending function. If the configuration is correct, the receiver's email account will receive the email.Before testing, click Apply to save the settings.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.12.7 SNMP

This function is for some series only.

You can connect the Device with some software such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB

Browser to manage and control the Device from the software.

Preparations

• Install the software that can manage and control the SNMP, such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB Browser
• Obtain the MIB files that correspond to the current version from the technical support.

Configuration Steps

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > SNMP.

The SNMP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-209.

Figure 4-209

Enable Version V1 V2 V3 (Recommended) SNMP Port 161 (1 - 65535) Read Community Write Community Trap Address Trap Port 162 (1 - 65535) Read Only User Public Read/Write User Private Authentication Type MD5 Authentication Type MD5 Authentication Pa... Authentication Pa... Encryption Type CBC-DES Encryption Type CBC-DES Encryption Password Encryption Password Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the SNMP parameters. See Table 4-58.

Step 3 Compile the two MIB files by MIB Builder.
Step 4 Run MG-SOFT MIB Browser to load in the module from compilation.
Step 5 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, enter the Device IP that you want to manage, and then select the version number to query.
Step 6 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, unfold the tree-structured directory to obtain the configurations of the Device, such as the channels quantity and software version.
Table 4-58

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the SNMP function.
Version	Select the check box of SNMP version(s) that you are using. The default version is V3. There is a risk of select V1 or V2.
SNMP Port	Indicates the monitoring port on the agent program.
Read Community	Indicates the read/write strings supported by the agent program.
Write Community
Trap Address	Indicates the destination address for the agent program to send the Trap information.
Trap Port	Indicates the destination port for the agent program to send the Trap information.
Read Only User	Enter the user name that is allowed to access the Device and has the "Read Only" permission.
Read/Write User	Enter the user name that is allowed to access the Device and has the "Read and Write" permission.
Authentication Type	Includes MD5 and SHA. The system recognizes automatically.
Authentication Password	Enter the password for authentication type and encryption type. The password should be no less than eight characters.
Encryption Password
Encryption Type	In the Encryption Type list, select an encryption type. The default setting is CBC-DES.

4.12.8 Multicast

When you access the Device from the network to view the video, if the access is exceeded, the video will not display. You can use the multicast function to group the IP to solve the problem.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > MULTICAST.

The MULTICAST interface is displayed. See Figure 4-210.

Figure 4-210

Enable IP Address 239 . 255 . 42 . 42 (224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255) Port 36666 (1025 - 65000) Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the multicast parameters. See Table 4-59.

Table 4-59

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the multicast function.
IP Address	Enter the IP address that you want to use as the multicast IP.The IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255.
Port	Enter the port for the multicast. The port ranges from 1025 through 65000.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

You can use the multicast IP address to login the web.

On the web login dialog box, in the Type list, select MULTICAST. The web will automatically obtain the multicast IP address and join. Then you can view the video through multicast function.

4.12.9 Alarm Centre

You can configure the alarm center server to receive the uploaded alarm information. To use this function, the Alarm Upload check box must be selected.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > ALARM CENTER.

The ALARM CENTER interface is displayed. See Figure 4-211.

Figure 4-211

Enable Protocol Type ALARM CENTER Host IP 10 . 1 . 0 . 2 Host IP 10 . 1 . 0 . 3 Port 1 Self-Report Time ALL 08:00 Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm center parameters. See Table 4-60.

Table 4-60

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the alarm center function.
Protocol Type	In theProtocol Typelist, select protocol type. The default is ALARM CENTER.
Host IP	The IP address and communication port of the PC installed with alarm client.
Port
Self-Report Time	In theSelf-Report Timelist, select time cycle and specific time for uploading alarm.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.12.10Register

You can register the Device into the specified proxy server which acts as the transit to make it easier for the client software to access the Device.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > REGISTER.

The REGISTER interface is displayed. See Figure 4-212.

Figure 4-212

Enable No. 1 Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 Port 7000 (1 - 65535) ID 0 Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the register parameters. See Table 4-61.

Table 4-61

Function	Description
Enable	Enable the register function.
Server IP Address	Enter the server IP address or the server domain that you want to register to.
Port	Enter the port of the server.
Sub Service ID	This ID is allocated by the server and used for the Device.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.12.11P2P

P2P is a kind of convenient private network penetration technology. You do not need to apply for dynamic domain name, doing port mapping or deploying transit server. You can add NVR devices through the below way to achieve the purpose of managing multiple NVR devices at the same time.

• Scan the QR code, download mobile app, and then register an account. For details, see Mobile App Operation.
• Log in www.gotop2p.com, register an account, and then add device via the serial number.

For details, see Introduction of P2P Operations.

Connect the NVR device to the Internet, otherwise P2P can not run properly.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > P2P.

The P2P interface is displayed. See Figure 4-213.

Figure 4-213

Enable To assist you in remotely managing your device, the P2P will be enabled. After enabling P2P and connecting to Internet, we need to collect IP address, MAC address, device name, device SN, etc. All collected info is used only for the purpose of remote access. If you don't agree to enable P2P function, please deselect the check box Status Offline Cellphone client Scan the QR code on the actual interface Scan QR to download Device SN Scan the QR code on the actual interface 0 Apply Back

Step 2 Enable the P2P function.

After the P2P function is enabled and connected to the Internet, the system will collects your information for remote access, and the information includes but not limited to email address, MAC address, and device serial number.

You can start adding the device.

• Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device.
• Platform: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to the P2P management platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can

access and manage the device in the WAN. For details, refer to the P2P operation manual.

You can also enter the QR code of Cell Phone Client and Device SN by clicking on the top right of the interfaces after you have entered the Main Menu.

To use this function, take adding device into Cell Phone Client as an example.

Mobile APP Operation

The following contents are introduced in the example of mobile App.

Step 1 Scan the QR code to download and install the mobile App.

Step 2 Select Camera and enter the main interface.

Step 3 Register device in the mobile App:

1) Click and select Device Manager. See Figure 4-214.

Figure 4-214

CAMERA DOOR ALARM MORE

Live Preview OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs OKs

Home Live Preview Playback Device Manager Favorites Local Files Local Config

2) Click and enter the Add Device interface.

2.

1. Mobile App supports device initialization.

3) Select Wired Device > P2P to enter the P2P interface.

4) Click the QR code icon behind the SN to enter the QR code scan interface.

5) Scan the device label or scan the SN QR code got by selecting Main Menu > Network > P2P. When the scan is successful, the device SN will be displayed in the SN item.

6) Enter name and password.

Step 4 After device registration on mobile App, click Start Preview and you can see the monitor screen.

4.12.12802.1X

Device needs to pass 802.1x certification to enter the LAN.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > NETWORK > 802.1x.

The 802.1x interface is displayed. See Figure 4-215 or Figure 4-216.

Figure 4-215

Ethernet Card Ethernet1 Enable Authentication PEAP CA Certificate Browse Username Password Apply Back

Figure 4-216

Ethernet Card Ethernet Port1 Enable Authentication TLS Identity CA Certificate Browse Client Certificate Browse Private Key Browse Private Key Password Apply Back

Step 2 Select the Ethernet card you want to certify.
Step 3 Select Enable and configure parameters. See Table 4-62.

Table 4-62

Parameter	Description
Authentication	PEAP: protected EAP protocol.TLS: Transport Layer Security. Provide privacy and data integrity between two communications application programs.
Identity	It can be configured when Authentication is TLS.
CA Certificate	Enable it and click Browse to import CA certificate from flash drive.
Username	The username shall be authorized at server.
Password	Password of the corresponding username.
Client Certificate	When Authentication is TLS, click Browse to import from flash drive.
Private Key
Private Key Password	It can be configured when Authentication is TLS.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.13 Storage

You can manage the storage resources (such as record file) and storage space. So that it is easy for you to use and enhance storage space usage.

4.13.1 Basic

You can set basic storage parameters.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > BASIC.

The Basic interface is displayed. See Figure 4-217.

Figure 4-217

HDD Full Overwrite Pack Mode Time Length 60 Min. Auto Delete Old Files Never Apply Back

Step 2 Set parameters. See Table 4-63.

Table 4-63

Parameter	Description
HDD Full	Configure the settings for the situation all the read/write discs are full, and there is no more free disc.SelectStop Recordto stop recordingSelectOverwriteto overwrite the recorded video files always from the earliest time.
Pack Mode	Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.
Auto-Delete Old Files	Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, configure the days.The auto delete file cannot be recovered!

Step 3 Click Apply or Save to complete setup.

4.13.2 Schedule

You can set schedule record and schedule snapshot. NVR can record or snapshot as you specified. For detailed information, refer to "4.1.4.6.1 Schedule Record" and "4.1.4.6.2 Schedule Snapshot".

4.13.3 HDD

You can view and sett HDD properties and format HDD.

You can view current HDD type, status, capacity and etc. The operation includes format HDD, and change HDD property (read and write/read-only/redundancy).

● To prevent files be overwritten in the future, you can set HDD as read-only.
● To backup recorded video file, you can set HDD as redundant HDD.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > Storage > HDD MANAGER, The HDD MANAGER interface is displayed. See Figure 4-218.

Figure 4-218

1* Device Name Physical Position Type Health status Free Sp All - - - 2.0 1* sda main board-3 Read/Write Normal 2.0 Format Apply Back

Step 2 Select a HDD and then select a time from the dropdown list.
Step 3 Click Apply button to complete the setup. System needs to restart to activate current setup if you want to format the HDD.

4.13.4 Record Control

After you set schedule record or schedule snapshot function, set auto record/snapshot function so that the NVR can automatically record or snapshot. For detailed information, refer to "4.1.4.6.3 Record Control".

4.13.5 Advance (HDD Group)

You can set HDD group, and HDD group setup for main stream, sub stream and snapshot operation.

When you are setting HDD group, set a HDD for each channel, otherwise NVR cannot save current setup.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > ADVANCED.

The ADVANCED interface is displayed. See Figure 4-219.

Figure 4-219

HDD Main Stream Sub Stream Snapshot Device Name Group Apply Back

Step 2 Select the group for each HDD group, and then click Save to save the settings.

After configuring HDD group, under the Main Stream tab, Sub Stream tab and Snapshot tab, configure settings to save the main stream, sub stream and snapshot to different HDD group as selected by you.

4.13.6 HDD Detect

This function is for some series product only.

The HDD detect function is to detect HDD current status so that you can clearly understand the HDD performance and replace the malfunction HDD.

There are two detect types:

• Quick detect is to detect via the universal system files. System can quickly complete the HDD scan. If you want to use this function, make sure the HDD is in use now. If the HDD is removed from other device, make sure the HDD once storage the record files when installed on current device.
• Global detect adopts Windows mode to scan. It may take a long time and may affect the HDD that is recording.

4.13.6.1 Manual Detect

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > HDD DETECT > Manual Detect.

The Manual Detect interface is displayed. See Figure 4-220.

Figure 4-220

Manual Detect Detect Report Type Key Area Detect HDD Select HDD(s) Start Detect Stop Status Good Bad Block = 0 MB Detected HDD No. 0 Total Space 0.00 GB Error - Current HDD - Detect Speed - Process - Detect Time - Remaining Time -

Step 2 In the Type list, select Key Area Detect or Global Detect; and in the HDD list, select the HDD that you want to detect.

Step 3 Click Start Detect.

The system starts detecting the HDD and displays the detection information.

When system is detecting HDD, click Stop Detect to stop current detection. Click Start Detect to detect again.

4.13.6.2 Detect Report

After the detect operation, you can go to the detect report to view corresponding information. Replace the malfunction HDD in case there is data loss.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > HDD DETECT > Detect Report.

The Detect Report interface is displayed. See Figure 4-221.

Figure 4-221

Manual Detect Detect Report 1 HDD Port No. Detect Type Start Time Capacity Er 1 main board-3 Key Area Detect 2019-06-03 14:01:13 2794.52 GB

Step 2 Click

The Details interface is displayed. You can view detecting results and S.M.A.R.T reports. See Figure 4-222 and Figure 4-223.

Figure 4-222

Details Detect Results S.M.A.R.T Type Key Area Detect Backup to USB Device Good Bad Block = 1244 MB Detected HDD No. 1 Total Space 2794.52 GB Error 0 HDD Port No. 3 Error Sector List No. Sector No

Figure 4-223

Details Detect Results S.M.A.R.T Port main board-3 Module No. 213975 Status HDD state is good Describe: Smart ID Attribute Threshold Value Worst Value Current Value 1 Read Error Rate 6 118 99 190702592 3 Spin Up Time 0 96 93 0 4 Start/Stop Count 20 69 69 32115 5 Reallocated Sector Count 10 100 100 0 7 Seek Error Rate 30 57 53 983684058157

4.13.7 RAID

RAID (redundant array of independent disks) is a data storage virtualization technology that

combines multiple physical HDD components into a single logical unit for the purposes of data redundancy, performance improvement, or both.

• RAID function is for some series products only. Slight difference may be found on the user interface.
• The NVR supports RAID0, RAID1, RAID5, RAID6, and RAID 10. Local hot spare supports RAID1, RAID5, RAID6, and RAID10.

For the disk quantity required for each RAID type. See Table 4-64.

Table 4-64

RAID type	Required disk quantity
RAID0	At least 2.
RAID1	Only 2.
RAID5	At least 3, and using 4 disks to 6 disks is recommended.
RAID6	At least 4.
RAID10	At least 4.

4.13.7.1 Creating Manager

RAID has different levels (such as RAID5, RAID6). Each level has different data protection, data availability, and performance grade.

You can manually create RAID or just one click one button to create RAID. For create RAID function, you can select the physical HDD that does not include in the RAID group or the created disk array to create a RAID5. You can refer to the following situations:

• There is no RAID, no hotspare disk: System directly creates the RAID5 and creates one hotspare disk at the same time.
• There is no RAID, but there is a hotspare disk: System creates the RAID5 only. It uses previous hotspare disk.
• There is RAID: System cancel the previous RAID setup and then create the new RAID5. System creates the hotspare disk if there is no one. System uses previous hotspare disk if there is hotspare disk available.
• The background will format the virtual disk.

You can create different types of RAID as needed.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > RAID > RAID.

The RAID interface is displayed. See Figure 4-224.

Figure 4-224

RAID RAID Info Hotspare Disk Type Raid5 Working Mode Self-adaptive 3 Name Capacity Type Disk members Delete 1 Disk_1 931.46 GB General HDD - 2 Disk_2 2.72 TB General HDD - 3 Disk_3 2.72 TB General HDD - Create RAID Create Manually

Step 2 You can click Create RAID or Create Manually, and all the disks involved will be formatted.

- Click Create RAID, the system will create RAID automatically.

If there is no existing RAID and no hot spare disk, the system will create RAID5 and a hot spare disk automatically.
If there is no existing RAID, but existing hot spare disk, the system will only create RAID5 and use the existing hot spare disk automatically.
If there is existing RAID and existing hot spare disk, the system will delete the original RAID and create RAID5 with all the disks and use the existing hot spare disk automatically.

- Click Create Manually.

1) Select RAID type and disks as system instructed.
2) Click Create Manually, and then the format disk notice is displayed.
3) Click OK.

Step 3 After creating RAID, the disks need to sync with each other to finish the process. For RAID5 and RAID6, you can select different working mode.

- Self-Adaptive: Automatically adjust the RAID sync speed according to the business status.

When there is no business running, sync is performed at a high speed.
When there is business running, sync is performed at a low speed.

- Sync First: Resource priority is assigned to RAID sync.

• Business First: Resource priority is assigned to business operations.
• Balance: Resource is evenly distributed to RAID sync and business operations.

4.13.7.2 Raid Info

You can view the existing RAID information, including type, disk space, hot spare, and status.

Select Main Menu > STORAGE > RAID > RAID Info.

The RAID Info interface is displayed. See Figure 4-225.

Figure 4-225

RAID RAID Info Hotspare Disk 1 Working Mode Status Edit 1 Self-adaptive Active,Degraded,Recovering

4.13.7.3 Hot Spare Disk

You can add a hot spare disk to a specific disk in the RAID or to the entire RAID, and the hot spare disk is switched into operation if any disk fails.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > RAID > Hotspare Disk.

The Hotspare Disk interface is displayed. See Figure 4-226.

Figure 4-226

RAID	RAID Info	Hotspare Disk
3	Name	Capacity	Type	RAID Name	Edit	Delete
1	Disk_1	931.46 GB	General HDD	-	/	-
2	Disk_2	2.72 TB	General HDD	-	/	-
3	Disk_3	2.72 TB	General HDD	-	/	-

Step 2 Click the icon behind a disk.

Step 3 The New Hotspare interface is displayed. See Figure 4-227 (New hot spare (local) or Figure 4-228 (New hot spare (global).

Figure 4-227

New Hotspare Type Local Hotspare Add to md0 OK Cancel

Figure 4-228

New Hotspare Type Global Hotspare OK Cancel

Step 4 You can select Local Hotspare or Global Hotspare.

• Local Hotspare: Select the target disk, and the new disk will serve as the hot spare disk of the selected disk.
• Global Hotspare: the new disk will serve as the hot spare disk of the entire RAID.

Step 5 Click OK.

Click behind a hot spare disk to delete it.

4.13.8 Record Estimate

Record estimate function can calculate how long you can record video according to the HDD capacity, and calculate the required HDD capacity according to the record period.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > REC ESTIMATE.

The REC ESTIMATE interface is displayed. See Figure 4-229.

Figure 4-229

Cha... Edit Bit Rate(Kb/S) Record Time Resolution Frame Rate ✓ 1 ✓ 2048 24 1280x720(720P) 2 2 2048 24 720P ✓ 3 ✓ 2048 24 1920x1080(1080P) ✓ 4 ✓ 8192 24 1920x1080(1080P) 5 ✓ 2048 24 720P ✓ 6 ✓ 2048 24 1280x720(720P) 7 ✓ 2048 24 720P 8 ✓ 2048 24 720P 9 ✓ 2048 24 720P 10 ✓ 2048 24 720P 11 ✓ 2048 24 720P 12 ✓ 2048 24 720P 13 ✓ 2048 24 720P 14 ✓ 2048 24 720P 15 ✓ 2048 24 720P 16 ✓ 2048 24 720P 17 ✓ 2048 24 720P Known Space Known Time Capacity TB = 0 GB Select Time Days Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.

Step 2 Click

The Edit dialogue box is displayed. See Figure 4-230.

You can configure the Resolution, Frame Rate, Bit Rate and Record Time for the selected channel.

Figure 4-230

Edit Channel 1 Resolution 1280x720(720P) Frame Rate 25 Bit Rate 2048 Kb/S Record Time 24 Hour Copy Apply Back

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

Then the system will calculate the time period that can be used for storage according to the channels settings and HDD capacity.

Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

Calculating Recording Time

Step 1 On the REC ESTIMATE interface, click the Known Space tab.

The Known Space interface is displayed. See Figure 4-231.

Figure 4-231

Known Space Known Time Capacity 0 TB = 0 GB Select Time 0 Days Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.

Step 2 Click Select.

The Select HDD(s) interface is displayed.

Step 3 Select the check box of the HDD that you want to calculate.

In the Known Space tab, in the Time box, the recording time is displayed. See Figure 4-232.

Figure 4-232

Known Space Known Time Capacity 7 TB = 7000 GB Select Time $ Days Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.

Calculating HDD Capacity for Storage

Step 1 On the REC ESTIMATE interface, click the Known Time tab. The Known Time interface is displayed. See Figure 4-233.

Figure 4-233

Known Space Known Time Time 0 Days Capacity 0 TB = 0 GB Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.

Step 2 In the Time box, enter the time period that you want to record. In the Capacity box, the required HDD capacity is displayed.

4.13.9 FTP

You can store and view the recorded videos and snapshots on the FTP server.

Preparations

Purchase or download a FTP (File Transfer Protocol) server and install it on your PC.

For the created FTP user, you need to set the write permission; otherwise the upload of recorded videos and snapshots will be failed.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > FTP.

The FTP interface is displayed. See Figure 4-234.

Figure 4-234

Enable FTP SFTP (Recommended) Server Port 22 Anonymity User Name Password Remote Directory File Length(MB) 0 Image Upload Interval(Sec.) 2 Channel 1 Week Day Fri Alarm Intel MD General Period 1 00:00 - 24:00 Period 2 00:00 - 24:00 Default Test Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the FTP settings parameters. See Table 4-65.

Step 3 Click Test.
The system pops up a message to indicate success or failure. If failed, check the network connection or configurations.
Table 4-65
Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Parameter	Description
Enable	● Enable the FTP upload function.
FTP type	● Select FTP type.● FTP: Plaintext transmission.● SFTP: Encrypted transmission (recommended)
Server	IP address of FTP server.
Port	● FTP: The default is 21.● SFTP: The default is 22.
Anonymity	Enter the user name and password to login the FTP server.
User Name	Enable the anonymity function, and then you can login anonymously without entering the user name and password.
Password
Remote Directory	Create folder on FTP server.If you do not enter the name of remote directory, system automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.If you enter the name of remote directory, the system creates the folder with the entered name under the FTP root directory first, and then automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.
File Length(M)	Enter the length of the uploaded recorded video.If the entered length is less than the recorded video length, only a section of the recorded video can be uploaded.If the entered length is more than the recorded video length, the whole recorded video can be uploaded.If the entered length is 0, the whole recorded video will be uploaded.
Image Upload Interval (Sec.)	If this interval is longer than snapshot interval, the system takes the recent snapshot to upload. For example, the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 2 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the recent snapshot every 5 seconds.If this interval is shorter than snapshot interval, the system uploads the snapshot per the snapshot interval. For example, the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 10 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the snapshot every 10 seconds.To configure the snapshot interval, selectMain Menu > CAMERA > ENCODE > Snapshot.
Channel	Select the channel that you want to apply the FTP settings.
Week Day	Select the week day and set the time period that you want to upload the recorded files. You can set two periods for each week day.
Period 1, Period 2
Record type	Select the record type (Alarm, Intel, MD, and General) that you want to upload. The selected record type will be uploaded during the configured time period.

4.14 System

4.14.1 General

You can set device general information. It includes device information, system date. Refer to "4.1.4.1 General" for detailed information.

4.14.2 RS232

After setting RS-232 parameters, the NVR can use the COM port to connect to other device to debug and operate.

Step 1 Select MAIN MENU > SYSTEM >RS232.

The RS232 interface is displayed. See Figure 4-235.

Figure 4-235

Function Console Baud Rate 115200 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Check None Apply Back

Step 2 Configure parameters. See Table 4-66.

Step 3 Click Apply.
Table 4-66

Parameter	Description
Function	Select serial port control protocol. Console: Upgrade the program and debug with the console and mini terminal software. Keyboard: Control this Device with special keyboard. Adapter: Connect with PC directly for transparent transmission of data. Protocol COM: Configure the function to protocol COM, in order to overlay card number. PTZ Matrix: Connect matrix control. Different series products support different RS232 functions.The actual product shall prevail.
Baud Rate	Select Baud rate, which is 115200 by default.
Data Bits	It ranges from 5 to 8, which is 8 by default.
Stop Bits	It includes 1 and 2.
Parity	It includes none, odd, even, mark and null.

4.14.3 Security

4.14.3.1 Firewall

Step 1 Select Main Menu > SYSTEM > SECURITY > Firewall.

The Firewall interface is displayed. See Figure 4-236.

Figure 4-236

Firewall System Service Type Network Access Enable Mode Trusted Sites Blocked Sites Only the corresponding source host of the listed IP addresses/MAC is allowed to access co... Host IP/MAC Port Edit Delete Add Apply Back

Step 2 Select Enable to enable function in the Type list.
Step 3 Configure the parameters. See Table 4-67.

Table 4-67

Parameter	Description
Type	In the Type list, you can select Network Access, Sync Time-Whitelist, Forbid Ping and Semi Join.Network Access: Configure access right of IP host.Sync Time-Whitelist: Allow designated IP host to synchronize or change Device time. Prevent multiple IP hosts from synchronizing system time with one Device repeatedly.Forbid Ping: The Device does not respond to Ping requests.Semi Join: Protect Device operation from hacker attack.
Mode	Mode can be configured when Type is Network Access.If Trusted Sites is enabled, you can visit device port successfully with IP/MAC hosts in Trusted Sites.If Blocked Sites is enabled, you cannot visit device port with IP/MAC hosts in Blocked Sites.
Add	When Type is Network Access, you can configure IP Address, IP Segment and MAC Address.
IP Address	Enter IP Address, Start Port and End Port that is allowed or forbidden.
Start Port
End Port	When Type is IP Address, they can be configured. Start Port and End Port can be configured only in Network Access Type.
Start Address	Enter Start Address and End Address of IP Segment.
End Address	When Type is IP Segment, they can be configured.
MAC Address	Enter MAC Address that is allowed or forbiddenWhen Type is MAC Address, it can be configured.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.14.3.2 System Service

You can enable or disable the system internal services.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > SYSTEM > SECURITY > System Service.

The System Service interface is displayed. See Figure 4-237.

Figure 4-237

Firewall System Service ✓ Mobile Phone Push ✓ CGI ✓ ONVIF ✓ NTP Server □ Audio/Video Trans... The corresponding device or software shall supp... Apply Cancel

Step 2 Select Enable to enable function in the Type list.
Step 3 Configure the parameters. See Table 4-68.

Table 4-68

Parameter	Description
Mobile Phone Push	After enabling this function, the alarm triggered by the NVR can be pushed to the mobile phone. This function is enable by default.
CGI	If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added through the CGI protocol.This function is enabled by default.
ONVIF	If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added through the ONVIF protocol.This function is enabled by default.
Audio/Video Transmission	Enable or disable the audio and video stream encryption. If enabled, make sure the devices or software support decryption.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.15 Account

You can manage users, user group and ONVIF user, set admin security questions.

- For the user name, the string max length is 31-byte, and for the user group, the string max length is 15-byte. The user name can only contain English letters, numbers and “ ”、“@”、“.”

- The default user amount is 64 and the default group amount is 20. System account adopts two-level management: group and user. The user authorities shall be smaller than group authorities (The admin user authorities are set by default).

- For group or user management, there are two levels: admin and user. The user name shall be unique and one user shall only belong to one group.

4.15.1 User

4.15.1.1 Add User

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User.

The User interface is displayed. See Figure 4-238.

Figure 4-238

1 Username Group Name Edit Delete Status MAC Address Mem 1 admin admin Login Net admin 's ac Add User

Step 2 Click Add User button in Figure 4-238.
The Add User interface is displayed. See Figure 4-239.

Figure 4-239

Add User Username Password Confirm Password Memo Group admin User MAC Period Setting Authority System Playback Monitor All ACCOUNT SYSTEM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INFO MANUAL CONTROL STORAGE EVENT MANAGEMENT NETWORK MANAGEMENT CAMERA SECURITY BACKUP DEVICE MAINTENANCE OK Back

Step 3 Input the user name, password, select the group it belongs to from the dropdown list. Then you can check the corresponding rights for current user. See Table 4-69.

Table 4-69

Parameter	Description
User Name	Enter a user name and password for the account.
Password
Confirm Password	Re-enter the password.
Memo	Optional.Enter a description of the account.
User MAC	Enter user MAC address
Group	Select a group for the account.The user rights must be within the group permission.
Period	ClickSetto displaySetinterface.Define a period during which the new account can login the device.The new account cannot login the device during the time beyond the set period.
Authority	In theAuthorityarea, select the check boxes in theSystemtab,Playbacktab, andMonitortab.To manage the user account easily, when defining the user account authority, it is recommended not to give the authority to the common user account higher that the advanced user account.

Step 4 Click OK button.

Click to modify the corresponding user information, click to delete the user.

4.15.1.2 Modify Password

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > User, click of the corresponding user. The Modify User interface is displayed. See Figure 4-240.

Figure 4-240

Modify User Username admin User MAC Modify Password Group Old Password Memo New Password Unlock Pattern Confirm Password Prompt Question Authority System Playback Monitor All SYSTEM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INFO MANUAL CONTROL ACCOUNT STORAGE EVENT MANAGEMENT NETWORK MANAGEMENT CAMERA SECURITY BACKUP DEVICE MAINTENANCE OK Back

Step 2 Check the box to enable Modify Password function. Enter old password and then enter new password twice.

• Password/confirm password: The password ranges from 8 to 32 digitals. It can contain letters, numbers and special characters (excluding “”, “”, “”, “”, “&”). The password shall contain at least two categories. Usually we recommend the strong password.
• For the user of account authority, it can modify the password of other user.
• STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-For your device own safety, create a strong password of your own choosing. We also recommend you change your password periodically especially in the high security system.

- Check the box to enable Unlock Pattern function, click

Step 3 Enter the Unlock Pattern interface to set. See Figure 4-241.

Figure 4-241

Unlock Pattern Please draw the unlock pattern. Back

Step 4 Click Back.

4.15.2 Group

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > Group.

The Group interface is displayed. See Figure 4-242.

Figure 4-242

2 Group Name Edit Delete Memo 1 admin ✓ ✓ administrator group 2 user ✓ ✓ user group Add Group

Step 2 Click Add Group button in Figure 4-242.

The Add Group interface is displayed. See Figure 4-243.

Step 3 Enter group name and then input some memo information if necessary. Check the box to select authorities.

Figure 4-243

Add Group Group Name Memo Authority System Playback Monitor All ACCOUNT SYSTEM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INFO MANUAL CONTROL STORAGE EVENT MANAGEMENT NETWORK MANAGEMENT CAMERA SECURITYBACKUP DEVICE MAINTENANCE OK Back

Step 4 Click OK.

Click 📋 to modify the corresponding group information, click 🔒 to delete the group.

4.15.3 Reset Password

You can set security questions and answers. After you successfully answered security questions, you can reset admin account password.

This function is for admin user only.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > PASSWORD RESET.

The PASSWORD RESET interface is displayed. See Figure 4-244.

Figure 4-244

Reset Password Enable Email Address Security Question Please set a security question so that you can find the password of admin again. Question 1 What is your favorite children' s book? Answer Question 2 What was the first name of your first boss? Answer Question 3 What is the name of your favorite fruit? Answer Apply Back

Step 2 Check the box to enable Reset password function.

This function is enabled by default.

Step 3 Input proper security questions and answers.

Step 4 Click OK.

After you successfully set security questions, you can answer the security questions to reset admin password.

4.15.4 ONVIF User

When the camera from the third party is connected with the NVR via the ONVIF user, use the verified ONVIF account to connect to the NVR. Here you can add/delete/modify user

• The default ONVIF user is admin. It is created after you initialize the NVR.
• For some series product, the ONVIF user password is modified when you are initializing the admin password.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > ACCOUNT > ONVIF User.

The ONVIF User interface is displayed. See Figure 4-245.

Figure 4-245

1 Username Group Name Edit Delete 1 admin admin Add User

Step 2 Click Add User button.

The Add User interface is displayed. See Figure 4-246.

Figure 4-246

Add User Username Password Confirm Password Group admin OK Back

Step 3 Set user name, password and then select group from the dropdown list.

Step 4 Click OK to complete setup.

4.16 Output and Display

4.16.1 Display

You can configure the display effect such as displaying time title and channel title, adjusting image transparency, and selecting the resolution.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Display.

The Display interface is displayed. See Figure 4-247.

Figure 4-247

Transparency Time Display Channel Display Image Enhance IVS Rule Original Scale Setting Main Screen VGA + HDMI1 Screen Enable Main Screen Extra Screen Screen No. VGA + HDMI1 Resolution 1280x1024 Test Temperature Screen No. VGA + HDMI1 Cha... D1 Audio Input Mix Output Default Apply Cancel

Step 2 Configure the settings for the display parameters. See Table 4-70.

Step 3 Click Apply.
Table 4-70

Parameter	Description
Transparency	Set the transparency of the local menu of the NVR device. The higher the transparency, the more transparent the local menu.
Time Display/Channel Display	Select the check box and the date and time of the system will be displayed in the preview screen.
Image Enhance	Select the check box to optimize the preview image edges.
IVS Rule	Select the check box to display the IVS rules in the preview interface.This function is for some series products only.
Original Scale	Click Setting and select the channel to restore the corresponding channel image to the original scale.
Main Screen	Select VGA+HDMI1 or HDMI2.Different devices display different contents. See the actual situation.
Screen Enable	Select the check box to enable this screen. The image can only b displayed when the screen is enabled.
Test Temperature	Check the box to test the object temperature, including trace the high/low temperature.
Resolution	Support 1920×1080, 1280×1024(default), 1280×720.
Screen No.	Enter the screen number you want to set the audio input.
Channel	Select the channel number.
Audio Input	Select from audio 1, audio 2 and mix output.

4.16.2 Tour

You can configure a tour of selected channels to repeat playing videos. The videos display in turn according to the channel group configured in tour settings. The system displays one channel group for a certain period and then automatically changes to the next channel group.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Tour.

The Tour interface is displayed. See Figure 4-248.

Figure 4-248

Screen No. Main Screen Video Detection View 1 Alarm View 1 Enable Tour Interval 5 s Window Split View 4 16 Window Split 1 1 2 3 4 2 5 6 7 8 3 9 10 11 12 4 13 14 15 16 5 17 18 19 20 6 21 22 23 24 7 25 26 27 28 8 29 30 31 32 9 33 34 35 36 10 37 38 39 40 11 41 42 43 44 12 45 46 47 48 13 49 50 51 52 14 53 54 55 56 15 57 58 59 60 Add Del Move up Move down Default Apply Cancel

On the top right of the live view screen, use the left mouse button or press Shift to switch

between (image switching is allowed) and (image switching is not allowed) to turn

on/off the tour function.

On the navigation bar, click to enable the tour and click to disable it.

Step 2 Configure the settings for the tour parameters. See Table 4-71.

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.
Table 4-71

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable tour function.
Interval (Sec.)	Enter the amount of time that you want each channel group displays on the screen. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 120 seconds, and the default value is 5 seconds.
Video Detect, Alarm	Select the View 1 or View 8 for Motion Detect tour and Alarm Tour (system alarm events).
Window Split	In the Window Split list, select View 1, View 4, View 8, or other modes that are supported by the Device.
Channel Group	Display all channel groups under the current Window Split setting.Add a channel group: Click Add, in the pop-up Add Group channel, select the channels to form a group, and then click Save.Delete a channel group: Select the check box of any channel group, and then click Delete.Edit a channel group: Select the check box of any channel group and then click Modify, or double-click on the group. The Modify Channel Group dialog box is displayed. You can regroup the channels.Click Move up or Move down to adjust the position of channel group.

4.16.3 Customized Display

You can set customized video split mode.

• This function is for some series products. Refer to the actual product for detailed information.
  ● Device max. supports 5 customized videos.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > DISPLAY > Custom Split.

The Custom Split interface is displayed. See Figure 4-249.

Figure 4-249

Name Del Apply Cancel

Step 2 Click and then click

System adopts the basic window mode as the new window name. For example, if you select the 8 display mode, the default name is Split8.

In regular mode, drag the mouse in the preview frame; you can merge several small windows to one window so that you can get you desired split mode. See Figure 4-250.

- After merge the window, system adopts the remaining window amount as the new name such as Split6.

- Select the window you want to merge (red highlighted), click to cancel the merge to restore the basic mode.

- Click to delete the customized window mode.

Figure 4-250

Name Del Splits Apply Cancel

Step 3 Click Apply to exit.

After the setup, you can go to the preview window, right click mouse and then select Custom Split. See Figure 4-251.

Figure 4-251

Main Menu Search PTZ View 1 View 4 View 8 View 9 View 16 View 25 View 36 Sequence Custom Split Split8 Smart Tracking Camera Registration Manual Preview Mode Crowd Distribution Auto Focus Image Sub Port

4.17 Audio

The audio function is to manage audio files and set schedule play function. It is to realize audio broadcast activation function.

This function is for some series product only.

4.17.1 File Manage

You can add audio files, listen to audio files, rename and delete audio files, and configure the audio volume.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AUDIO > File Manager.

The File Manager interface is displayed. See Figure 4-252.

Figure 4-252

Type Local 0 File Name Size Play Rename Delete File size: 2K-10MB, File Amo... Volume + Delete Add

Step 2 Click Add.

The Add interface is displayed. See Figure 4-253.

NVR supports USB port to import audio file only.

Figure 4-253

Add Device Name sdb5(USB DISK) Refresh Total Space 15.60 GB Free Space 15.59 GB Address // Name Size Type Delete IP Folder FSU6016U Folder RemoteConfig_20171103141044.csv 464 B File printf_20171105172349.txt 451.3 KB File kmsg_printf_20171105172349.txt 14.9 KB File LAN1-20171107135215.pcap 1.18 MB File LAN1-20171109135008.pcap 9.16 MB File softmusic.mp3 2.14 MB File OK Back

Step 3 Select the audio file and then click Import.

System supports MP3 and PCM audio format.

Step 4 Click OK to start importing audio files from the USB storage device.

If the importing is successful, the audio files will display in the File Manager interface.

4.17.2 Schedule

You can configure the settings to play the audio files during the defined time period.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > AUDIO > Schedule.

The Schedule interface is displayed. See Figure 4-254.

Figure 4-254

Period File Name Interval Repeat Output 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 None 60 Min. 0 Mic 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 None 60 Min. 0 Mic 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 None 60 Min. 0 Mic 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 None 60 Min. 0 Mic 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 None 90 Min. 0 Mic 00 : 00 - 24 : 00 None 60 Min. 0 Mic Apply Back

Step 2 Configure the settings for the schedule parameters. See Table 4-72.

Table 4-72

Parameter	Description
Period	In the Period box, enter the time. Select the check box to enable the settings.You can configure up to six periods.
File Name	In the File Name list, select the audio file that you want to play for this configured period.
Interval	In the Interval box, enter the time in minutes for how often you want to repeat the playing.
Repeat	Configure how many times you want to repeat the playing in thedefined period.
Output	Includes two options: MIC and Audio. It is MIC by default. The MIC function shares the same port with talkback function and the latter has the priority. Some series products do not have audio port. The actual product shall prevail.

• The finish time for audio playing depends on audio file size and the configured interval.
• Playing priority: Alarm event > Audio talk > Trial listening > Schedule audio file.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

4.17.3 Broadcast

System can broadcast to the camera, or broadcast to a channel group.

Step 1 Select Mani Menu > AUDIO > BROADCAST.

The BROADCAST interface is displayed. See Figure 4-255.

Figure 4-255

0 Group Name Memo Modify Del Add Group

Step 2 Click Add Group.

The Add Group interface is displayed. See Figure 4-256.

Figure 4-256

Add Group Group Name 1 Ch... All D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40 D41 D42 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50 D51 D52 D53 D54 D55 D56 D57 D58 D59 D60 D61 D62 D63 D64 Save Cancel

Step 3 Input group name and select one or more channels.

Step 4 Click Save button to complete broadcast group setup.

• On the broadcast interface, click to change group setup, click to delete group.
• After complete broadcast setup, on the preview interface and then click on the navigation bar, device pops up broadcast dialogue box. Select a group name and then click to begin broadcast. See Figure 4-257.

Figure 4-257

1 Group Name Memo Modify Del 1 test Channel D10 D18 Add Group

4.18 USB Device Auto Pop-up

After you inserted the USB device, system can auto detect it and pop up the following dialogue box. It allows you to conveniently backup file, log, configuration or update system. See Figure 4-258.

Refer to "4.17.1 File Manage", "4.10.1 Log", "4.10.4.2 IMP/EXP", and "4.10.4.4 System Update" for detailed information.

Figure 4-258

Find USB device. Name: sda1(USB USB) Capacity: 1.37 GB/14.83 GB(Free/Total) File Backup Log Backup Config Backup System Upgrade

4.19 Shutdown

• When you see corresponding dialogue box "System is shutting down..." Do not click power on-off button directly.
• Do not unplug the power cable or click power on-off button to shutdown device directly when device is running (especially when it is recording.)
• Shut down the device and then unplug the power cable before you replace the HDD.

Operations

● From the main menu (Recommended)

Step 1 Click at the top right corner. See Figure 4-259.

PLAYBACK View, search, and play recorded videos. AI Manage and view artificial intelligence and face recognition information and settings. ALARM View and search live alarm information. Configure alarm event actions. POS View POS information and configure related settings. OPERATION View System info, System update and Config (import/ export etc. BACKUP Search and back up video files. MANAGEMENT CAMERA NETWORK STORAGE SYSTEM ACCOUNT

Figure 4-259

Step 2 Select Shutdown.

Draw the unlock pattern or input password first if you have no authority to shut down. See Figure 4-260 or Figure 4-261.

Figure 4-260

SYSTEM LOGIN admin ALARM View and search live alarm information. Configure alarm event actions. POS View POS information and configure related settings. BACKUP Search and back up video files. Forgot Pattern Switch User MANAGEMENT CAMERA NETWORK STORAGE SYSTEM ACCOUNT LIVE Logout Reboot Shutdown

Figure 4-261

PLAYBACK View, search, and play recorded videos. AI Manage and view artificial intelligence and face recognition information and settings. ALARM View and search live alarm information. Configure alarm event actions. SYSTEM LOGIN Username admin Password OK Cancel BACKUP Search and back up video files. MANAGEMENT CAMERA NETWORK STORAGE SYSTEM ACCOUNT

- Remote Control

Press the power button on the remote for at least 3 seconds.

- Press the power button at the rear panel of the device.

Auto Resume after Power Failure

The system can automatically backup video file and resume previous working status after power failure.

• The interfaces in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased. If there is inconsistency between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.
• The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.
• Besides Web, you can use our Smart PSS to login the device. For detailed information, refer to Smart PSS user's manual.

5.1 Network Connection

• The factory default IP of the Device is 192.168.1.108.
• The Device supports monitoring on different browsers such as Safari, Firefox, Google to perform the functions such as multi-channel monitoring, PTZ control, and device parameters configurations.

Step 1 Check to make sure the Device has connected to the network.

Step 2 Configure the IP address, subnet mask and gateway for the PC and the Device. For details about network configuration of the Device, refer to "4.12 Network".

Step 3 On your PC, check the network connection of the Device by using "ping ***.***.***.***". Usually the return value of TTL is 255.

5.2 Web Login

Step 1 Open the browser, enter the IP address of the Device, and then press Enter. The Login in dialog box is displayed. See Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1

@Jhua TECHNOLOGY Web Login TCP Forgot Password Login

Step 2 Enter the user name and password.

• The default administrator account is admin. The password is the one that was configured during initial settings. To security your account, it is recommended to keep the password properly and change it regularly.
• Click to display the password.
• If you forget the password, click Forgot Password to reset the password. For details about resetting the password, refer to "5.3 Reset Password".

Step 3 Click Login.

5.3 Reset Password

You can reset the password by the following methods when you forget the password for admin account.

• If the password reset function is enabled, you can use mobile phone to scan the QR code on the local interface or web interface to reset the password.
• If the password reset function is disabled, the system prompts indicating password resetting function is disabled. To reset the password, try either of the following ways:

◇ Login the web with other user account to enable the password reset function.
- Go to local interface to reset the password. For details, refer to "4.1.3 Reset Password".

Step 1 Login the Web of the Device.

The Login in dialog box is displayed. See Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2

@lhua TECHNOLOGY Web Login TCP Forgot Password Login

Step 2 Click Forgot Password.

The Reset Password interface is displayed. See Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3

Reset Password 1.Info 2.Reset Type 3.Reset Password In order to provide a secure password reset environment, we need to collect your e-mail address. device MAC address. device SN, etc. All collected info is used only for the purposes of verifying device validity and sending a security code to you. Do you agree and want to continue the operation? OK Cancel

Step 3 Click OK.

The reset type interface is displayed. See Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-4

Reset Password 1.Info → 2.Reset Type 3.Reset Password SN:********00000 Scan the QR code on the actual interface Note(For admin only): Option 1. Please download EasyViewer and then from More-Reset Device Password, scan the left QR code. Option 2. Please use an APP to scan the left QR code to get encryption strings. And then send the strings to [e-mail]. The security code will be delivered to 1***@qq.com. Security code Cancel

Step 4 Follow the onscreen instructions to scan the QR code and get the security code.

• You can get the security code twice by scanning the same QR code. If you need to get the security code once again, refresh the interface.
• Use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24 hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.
• Wrong security code entrance up to five times will cause the security code locked for five minutes. After five minutes, you can continue to use this security code.

Step 5 In the Security code box, enter the security code received in your reserved email box.

Step 6 Click Next.

The new password resetting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5

Reset Password 1.Reset Type → 2.Reset the password User Name admin Password Confirm Password Cancel Save

Step 7 In the Password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Confirm Password box.

The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding", "", "; ", "; " and "&").

Step 8 Click Save. The password resetting is started.

After resetting is completed, a pop-up message is displayed to indicate the result and you will see the login interface is displayed. Then you can use the new password to login the web.

5.4 Web Main Menu

After you have logged in the Web, the main menu is displayed. See Figure 5-6.

For detailed operations, you can refer to "4 Local Basic Operation".

Figure 5-6

MANAGEMENT 2000-01-01 05:31:03 Saturday 1 2 3 4 5 6 LIVE View all the video PLAYBACK View touch, and play content video. AI Manage and write active configuration and store registration with data and settings. ALARM View all switch the alert information. Configure alarm and video. POS View FOS information with integer timer settings. OPERATION View System info. System spifter and Linky supervised PC.

Table 5-1

No.	Icon	Description
1		● Includes configuration menu through which you can configure camera settings, network settings, storage settings, system settings, account settings, and view information.
2	None	Displays system date and time.
3		When you point to , the current user account is displayed.
4		● Click , select Logout, Reboot, or Shutdown according to your actual situation.
5		Displays Cell Phone Client and Device SN QR Code.● Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device from your cell phone.● Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to the P2P management platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage the device in the WAN. For details, refer to the P2P operation manual. You can also configure P2P function in the local configurations, refer to "4.1.4.3 P2P".
6		Displays the web main menu.
7	None	Includes eight function tiles: LIVE, PLAYBACK, AI, ALARM, POS, OPERATION, BACKUP, DISPLAY, and AUDIO. Click each tile to open the configuration interface of the tile.LIVE: You can perform the operations such as viewing real-time video, configuring channel layout, setting PTZ controls, and using smart talk and instant record functions if needed.PLAYBACK: Search for and play back the recorded video saved on the Device.ALARM: Search for alarm information and configure alarm event actions.AI: Configure and manage artificial intelligent events. It includes smart search, parameters, and database.POS: View POS information and configure related settings.OPERATION: View system information, import/export system configuration files, or update system.BACKUP: Search and back up the video files to the local PC or external storage device such as USB storage device.DISPLAY: Configure the display effect such as displaying content, image transparency, and resolution, and enable the zero-channel function.AUDIO: Manage audio files and configure the playing schedule. The audio file can be played in response to an alarm event if the voice prompts function is enabled.

• DHCP: DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network protocol. It is one of the TCP/IP protocol cluster. It is principally used to assign temporary IP addresses to computers on a network.
• DDNS: DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name Server) is a service that maps Internet domain names to IP addresses. This service is useful to anyone who wants to operate a server (web server, mail server, ftp server and etc) connected to the internet with a dynamic IP or to someone who wants to connect to an office computer or server from a remote location with software.
• eSATA: eSATA(External Serial AT) is an interface that provides fast data transfer for external storage devices. It is the extension specifications of a SATA interface.
  ● GPS: GPS (Global Positioning System) is a satellite system, protected by the US military, safely orbiting thousands of kilometers above the earth.
• PPPoE: PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) is a specification for connecting multiple computer users on an Ethernet local area network to a remote site. Now the popular mode is ADSL and it adopts PPPoE protocol.
• Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi is the name of a popular wireless networking technology that uses radio waves to provide wireless high-speed Internet and network connections. The standard is for wireless local area networks (WLANs). It is like a common language that all the devices use to communicate to each other. It is actually IEEE802.11, a family of standard The IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc.)
• 3G: 3G is the wireless network standard. It is called 3G because it is the third generation of cellular telecom standards. 3G is a faster network for phone and data transmission and speed Is over several hundred kbps. Now there are four standards: CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and WiMAX.
• Dual-stream: The dual-stream technology adopts high-rate bit stream for local HD storage such as QCIF/CIF/2CIF/DCIF/4CIF encode and one low-rate bit stream for network transmission such as QCIF/CIF encode. It can balance the local storage and remote network transmission. The dual-stream can meet the difference band width requirements of the local transmission and the remote transmission. In this way, the local transmission using high-bit stream can achieve HD storage and the network transmission adopting low bit stream suitable for the fluency requirements of the 3G network such as WCDMA, EVDO, TD-SCDMA..
• On-off value: It is the non-consecutive signal sampling and output. It includes remote sampling and remote output. It has two statuses: 1/0.

Questions	Solutions
NVR cannot boot up properly.	Input power is not correct.Power connection is not correct.Power switch button is damaged.Program upgrade is wrong.HDD malfunction or something wrong with HDD ribbon.Seagate DB35.1, DB35.2, SV35 or Maxtor 17-g has compatibility problem. Please upgrade to the latest version to solve this problem.Front panel error.Main board is damaged.
NVR often automatically shuts down or stops running.	Input voltage is not stable or it is too low.HDD malfunction or something wrong with the ribbon.Button power is not enough.Front video signal is not stable.Working environment is too harsh, too much dust.Hardware malfunction.
System cannot detect hard disk.	HDD is broken.HDD ribbon is damaged.HDD cable connection is loose.Main board SATA port is broken.
There is no video output whether it is one-channel, multiple-channel or all-channel output.	Program is not compatible. Please upgrade to the latest version.Brightness is 0. Please restore factory default setup.Check your screen saver.NVR hardware malfunctions.
I cannot search local records.	HDD ribbon is damaged.HDD is broken.Upgraded program is not compatible.The recorded file has been overwritten.Record function has been disabled.
Video is distorted when searching local records.	Video quality setup is too low.Program read error, bit data is too small. There is mosaic in the full screen. Please restart the NVR to solve this problem.HDD data ribbon error.HDD malfunction.NVR hardware malfunctions.
Time display is not correct.	Setup is not correctBattery contact is not correct or voltage is too low.Crystal is broken.
NVR cannot control PTZ.	Front panel PTZ errorPTZ decoder setup, connection or installation is not correct.Cable connection is not correct.PTZ setup is not correct.PTZ decoder and NVR protocol is not compatible.PTZ decoder and NVR address is not compatible.When there are several decoders, please add 120 Ohm between the PTZ decoder A/B cables furthest end to delete the reverberation or impedance matching. Otherwise the PTZ control is not stable.The distance is too far.
I cannot log in client-end or web.	For Windows 98 or Windows ME user, please update your system to Windows 2000 sp4. Or you can install client-end software of lower version. Please note right now, our NVR is not compatible with Windows VISTA control.ActiveX control has been disabled.No dx8.1 or higher. Please upgrade display card driver.Network connection error.Network setup error.Password or user name is invalid.Client-end is not compatible with NVR program.
There is only mosaic no video when preview or playback video file remotely.	Network fluency is not good.Client-end resources are limit.Current user has no right to monitor.
Network connection is not stable.	Network is not stable.IP address conflict.MAC address conflict.PC or device network card is not good.
Burn error /USB back error.	Burner and NVR are in the same data cable.System uses too much CPU resources. Please stop record first and then begin backup.Data amount exceeds backup device capacity. It may result in burner error.Backup device is not compatible.Backup device is damaged.
Keyboard cannot control NVR.	NVR serial port setup is not correctAddress is not correctWhen there are several switchers, power supply is not enough.Transmission distance is too far.
Alarm signal cannot been disarmed.	● Alarm setup is not correct.● Alarm output has been open manually.● Input device error or connection is not correct.● Some program versions may have this problem. Please upgrade your system.
Alarm function is null.	● Alarm setup is not correct.● Alarm cable connection is not correct.● Alarm input signal is not correct.● There are two loops connect to one alarm device.
Record storage period is not enough.	● Camera quality is too low. Lens is dirty. Camera is installed against the light. Camera aperture setup is not correct.● HDD capacity is not enough.● HDD is damaged.
Cannot playback the downloaded file.	● There is no media player.● No DXB8.1 or higher graphic acceleration software.● There is no DivX503Bundle.exe control when you play the file transformed to AVI via media player.● No DivX503Bundle.exe or ffdshow-2004 1012 .exe in Windows XP OS.
Forgot local menu operation password or network password	● Please contact your local service engineer or our sales person for help. We can guide you to solve this problem.
There is no video. The screen is in black.	● IPC IP address is not right.● IPC port number is not right.● IPC account (user name/password) is not right.● IPC is offline.
The displayed video is not full in the monitor.	Please cheek current resolution setup. If the current setup is 1920*1080, then you need to set the monitor resolution as 1920*1080.
There is no HDMI output.	● Displayer is not in HDMI mode.● HDMI cable connection is not right.
The video is not fluent when I view in multiple-channel mode from the client-end.	● The network bandwidth is not sufficient. The multiple-channel monitor operation needs at least 100M or higher.● Your PC resources are not sufficient. For 16-ch remote monitor operation, the PC shall have the following environment:Quad Core, 2G or higher memory, independent displayer, display card memory 256M or higher.
I can not connect to the IPC	Please make sure the IPC has booted up.IPC network connection is right and it is onlineIPC IP is in the blacklist.The device has connected to the too many IPC. It cannot transmit the video.Check the IPC port value and the time zone is the same as the NVR.Make sure current network environment is stable.
After I set the NVR resolution as 1080P, my monitor can not display.	Shut down the device and then reboot. When you reboot, please press the Fn button at the same time and then release after 5 seconds. You can restore NVR resolution to the default setup.
My admin account has been changed and I can not log in.	Use telnet and then input the following command:cd /mnt/mtd/Config/rm -rf grouprm -rf passwordReboot the device to restore the default password.
After I login the Web , I can not find the remote interface to add the IPC.	Please clear the Web controls and load again.
There is IP and gateway, I can access the internet via the router. But I can not access the internet after I reboot the NVR.	Please use command PING to check you can connect to the gateway or not. Use telnet to access and then use command "ifconfig -a" to check device IP address. If you see the subnet mask and the gateway has changed after the reboot. Please upgrade the applications and set again.
I use the VGA monitor.I want to know if I use the multiple-window mode, I see the video from the main stream or the sub stream?	For 32-channel series product, the 9/16-window is using the sub stream.For 4/8/16 series product, system is using the main stream no matter you are in what display mode.

Daily Maintenance

• Please use the brush to clean the board, socket connector and the chassis regularly.
• The device shall be soundly earthed in case there is audio/video disturbance. Keep the device away from the static voltage or induced voltage.
• Please unplug the power cable before you remove the audio/video signal cable, RS232 or RS485 cable.
• Do not connect the TV to the local video output port (VOUT). It may result in video output circuit.
  ● Always shut down the device properly. Please use the shutdown function in the menu, or you can press the power button in the rear pane for at least three seconds to shut down the device.

Otherwise it may result in HDD malfunction.

• Please make sure the device is away from the direct sunlight or other heating sources. Please keep the sound ventilation.
• Please check and maintain the device regularly.

Appendix 1 Cybersecurity Recommendations

Cybersecurity is more than just a buzzword: it's something that pertains to every device that is connected to the internet. IP video surveillance is not immune to cyber risks, but taking basic steps toward protecting and strengthening networks and networked appliances will make them less susceptible to attacks. Below are some tips and recommendations on how to create a more secured security system.

Mandatory actions to be taken for basic equipment network security:

1. Use Strong Passwords

Please refer to the following suggestions to set passwords:

• The length should not be less than 8 characters;
• Include at least two types of characters; character types include upper and lower case letters, numbers and symbols;
• Do not contain the account name or the account name in reverse order;
• Do not use continuous characters, such as 123, abc, etc.;
• Do not use overlapped characters, such as 111, aaa, etc.;

2. Update Firmware and Client Software in Time

- According to the standard procedure in Tech-industry, we recommend to keep your equipment (such as NVR, DVR, IP camera, etc.) firmware up-to-date to ensure the system is equipped with the latest security patches and fixes. When the equipment is connected to the public network, it is recommended to enable the “auto-check for updates” function to obtain timely information of firmware updates released by the manufacturer.

• We suggest that you download and use the latest version of client software.

“Nice to have” recommendations to improve your equipment network security:

1. Physical Protection

We suggest that you perform physical protection to equipment, especially storage devices. For example, place the equipment in a special computer room and cabinet, and implement well-done access control permission and key management to prevent unauthorized personnel from carrying out physical contacts such as damaging hardware, unauthorized connection of removable equipment (such as USB flash disk, serial port), etc.

2. Change Passwords Regularly

We suggest that you change passwords regularly to reduce the risk of being guessed or cracked.

3. Set and Update Passwords Reset Information Timely

The equipment supports password reset function. Please set up related information for password reset in time, including the end user's mailbox and password protection questions. If the information changes, please modify it in time. When setting password protection questions, it is suggested not to use those that can be easily guessed.

4. Enable Account Lock

The account lock feature is enabled by default, and we recommend you to keep it on to guarantee the account security. If an attacker attempts to log in with the wrong password several times, the corresponding account and the source IP address will be locked.

5. Change Default HTTP and Other Service Ports

We suggest you to change default HTTP and other service ports into any set of numbers between 1024\~65535, reducing the risk of outsiders being able to guess which ports you are using.

6. Enable HTTPS

We suggest you to enable HTTPS, so that you visit Web service through a secure communication channel.

7. Enable Whitelist

We suggest you to enable whitelist function to prevent everyone, except those with specified IP addresses, from accessing the system. Therefore, please be sure to add your computer's IP address and the accompanying equipment's IP address to the whitelist.

8. MAC Address Binding

We recommend you to bind the IP and MAC address of the gateway to the equipment, thus reducing the risk of ARP spoofing.

9. Assign Accounts and Privileges Reasonably

According to business and management requirements, reasonably add users and assign a minimum set of permissions to them.

10. Disable Unnecessary Services and Choose Secure Modes

If not needed, it is recommended to turn off some services such as SNMP, SMTP, UPnP, etc., to reduce risks.

If necessary, it is highly recommended that you use safe modes, including but not limited to the following services:

• SNMP: Choose SNMP v3, and set up strong encryption passwords and authentication passwords.
• SMTP: Choose TLS to access mailbox server.
• FTP: Choose SFTP, and set up strong passwords.
• AP hotspot: Choose WPA2-PSK encryption mode, and set up strong passwords.

11. Audio and Video Encrypted Transmission

If your audio and video data contents are very important or sensitive, we recommend that you use encrypted transmission function, to reduce the risk of audio and video data being stolen during transmission.

Reminder: encrypted transmission will cause some loss in transmission efficiency.

12. Secure Auditing

• Check online users: we suggest that you check online users regularly to see if the device is logged in without authorization.
• Check equipment log: By viewing the logs, you can know the IP addresses that were used to log in to your devices and their key operations.

13. Network Log

Due to the limited storage capacity of the equipment, the stored log is limited. If you need to save the log for a long time, it is recommended that you enable the network log function to ensure that the critical logs are synchronized to the network log server for tracing.

14. Construct a Safe Network Environment

In order to better ensure the safety of equipment and reduce potential cyber risks, we recommend:

• Disable the port mapping function of the router to avoid direct access to the intranet devices from external network.
• The network should be partitioned and isolated according to the actual network needs. If there are no communication requirements between two sub networks, it is suggested to use VLAN, network GAP and other technologies to partition the network, so as to achieve the network isolation effect.
• Establish the 802.1x access authentication system to reduce the risk of unauthorized access to private networks.

Calculate total capacity needed by each device according to video recording (video recording type and video file storage time).

Step 1: According to Formula (1) to calculate storage capacity q_i that is the capacity of each channel needed for each hour, unit Mbyte.

$$ q _ {i} \quad d _ {i} \quad 1 0 2 4: \tag {1} $$

In the formula: d_i means the bit rate, unit Kbit/s

Step 2: After video time requirement is confirmed, according to Formula (2) to calculate the storage capacity m_i , which is storage of each channel needed unit Mbyte.

$$ m _ {i} = q _ {i} \times h _ {i} \times D _ {i} \tag {2} $$

In the formula:

h_i means the recording time for each day (hour)

D_i means number of days for which the video shall be kept

Step 3: According to Formula (3) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) q_T that is needed for all channels in the device during scheduled video recording.

$$ q _ {T} = \sum_ {i = 1} ^ {c} m _ {i} \tag {3} $$

In the formula: c means total number of channels in one device

Step 4: According to Formula (4) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) q_T that is needed for all channels in device during alarm video recording (including motion detection).

$$ q _ {T} = \sum_ {i = 1} ^ {c} m _ {i} \times a \% \tag{4} $$

In the formula: a% means alarm occurrence rate

Appendix 3 Compatible Network Camera List

Please note all the models in the following list for reference only. For those products not included in the list, please contact your local retailer or technical supporting engineer for detailed information.

Manufacture	Model	Version	Video Encode	Audio/Video	Protocol
AXIS	P1346	5.40.9.2	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	P3344/P3344-E	5.40.9.2	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	P5512	—	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	Q1604	5.40.3.2	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	Q1604-E	5.40.9	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	Q6034E	—	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	Q6035	5.40.9	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	Q1755	—	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	M7001	—	H264	√	Private
	M3204	5.40.9.2	H264	√	Private
	P3367	HEAD LFP4_0 130220	H264	√	ONVIF
	P5532-P	HEAD LFP4_0 130220	H264	√	ONVIF
ACTi	ACM-3511	A1D-220-V3.12 .15-AC	MPEG4	√	Private
	ACM-8221	A1D-220-V3.13 .16-AC	MPEG4	√	Private
Arecont	AV1115	65246	H264	√	Private
	AV10005DN	65197	H264	√	Private
	AV2115DN	65246	H264	√	Private
	AV2515DN	65199	H264	√	Private
	AV2815	65197	H264	√	Private
	AV5115DN	65246	H264	√	Private
	AV8185DN	65197	H264	√	Private
Bosch	NBN-921-P	—	H264	√	ONVIF
	NBC-455-12P	—	H264	√	ONVIF
	VG5-825	9500453	H264	√	ONVIF
	NBN-832	66500500	H264	√	ONVIF
	VEZ-211-IWT EIVA	—	H264	√	ONVIF
	NBC-255-P	15500152	H264	√	ONVIF
	VIP-X1XF	—	H264	√	ONVIF
Brikcom	B0100	—	H264	√	ONVIF
	D100	—	H264	√	ONVIF
	GE-100-CB	—	H264	√	ONVIF
	FB-100A	v1.0.3.9	H264	√	ONVIF
	FD-100A	v1.0.3.3	H264	√	ONVIF
Cannon	VB-M400	—	H264	√	Private
CNB	MPix2.0DIR	XNETM112011 1229	H264	√	ONVIF
	VIPBL1.3MIR VF	XNETM210011 1229	H264	√	ONVIF
	IGC-2050F	XNETM210011 1229	H264	√	ONVIF
CP PLUS	CP-NC9-K	6.E.2.7776	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	CP-NC9W-K	6.E.2.7776	H264	√	Private
	CP-ND10-R	cp20111129AN S	H264	√	ONVIF
	CP-ND20-R	cp20111129AN S	H264	√	ONVIF
	CP-NS12W-C R	cp20110808NS	H264	√	ONVIF
	VS201	cp20111129NS	H264	√	ONVIF
	CP-NB20-R	cp20110808BN S	H264	√	ONVIF
	CP-NT20VL3-R	cp20110808BN S	H264	√	ONVIF
	CP-NS36W-A R	cp20110808NS	H264	√	ONVIF
	CP-ND20VL2-R	cp20110808BN S	H264	√	ONVIF
	CP-RNP-1820	cp20120821NS A	H264	√	Private
	CP-RNC-TP2 0FL3C	cp20120821NS A	H264	√	Private
	CP-RNP-12D	cp20120828AN S	H264	√	Private
	CP-RNC-DV1 0	cp20120821NS A	H264	√	Private
	CP-RNC-DP2 0FL2C	cp20120821NS A	H264	√	Private
Dynacolor	ICS-13	d20120214NS	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	ICS-20W	vt20111123NSA	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	NA222	—	H264	√	ONVIF
	MPC-IPVD-03 13	k20111208ANS	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	MPC-IPVD-0313AF	k20111208BNS	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
Honeywell	HIDC-1100PT	h.2.2.1824	H264	√	ONVIF
	HIDC-1100P	h.2.2.1824	H264	√	ONVIF
	HIDC-0100P	h.2.2.1824	H264	√	ONVIF
	HIDC-1300V	2.0.0.21	H264	√	ONVIF
	HICC-1300W	2.0.1.7	H264	√	ONVIF
	HICC-2300	2.0.0.21	H264	√	ONVIF
	HDZ20HDX	H20130114NSA	H264	√	ONVIF
LG	LW342-FP	—	H264	√	Private
	LNB5100	—	H264	√	ONVIF
Imatek	KNC-B5000	—	H264	√	Private
	KNC-B5162	—	H264	√	Private
	KNC-B2161	—	H264	√	Private
Panasonic	NP240/CH	—	MPEG4	√	Private
	WV-NP502	—	MPEG4	√	Private
	WV-SP102H	1.41	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SP105H	—	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SP302H	1.41	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SP306H	1.4	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SP508H	—	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SP509H	—	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SF332H	1.41	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SW316H	1.41	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SW355H	1.41	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SW352H	—	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SW152E	1.03	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SW558H	—	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SW559H	—	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SP105H	1.03	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SW155E	1.03	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SF336H	1.44	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SF332H	1.41	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SF132E	1.03	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SF135E	1.03	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SF346H	1.41	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SF342H	1.41	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SC385H	1.08	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SC386H	1.08	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	WV-SP539	1.66	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF
	DG-SC385	1.66	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF
PELCO	IXSOLW	1.8.1-20110912-1.9082-A1.6617	H264	√	Private
	IDE20DN	1.7.41.9111-O3.6725	H264	√	Private
	D5118	1.7.8.9310-A1.5288	H264	√	Private
	IM10C10	1.6.13.9261-O2.4657	H264	√	Private
	DD4N-X	01.02.0015	MPEG4	√	Private
	DD423-X	01.02.0006	MPEG4	√	Private
	D5220	1.8.3-FC2-20120614-1.9320-A1.8035	H264	√	Private
Samsung	SNB-3000P	2.41	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNP-3120	1.22_110120_1	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNP-3370	1.21_110318	MPEG4	√	Private
	SNB-5000	2.10_111227	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	SND-5080	—	H264、MPEG4	√	Private
	SNZ-5200	1.02_110512	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNP-5200	1.04_110825	H264、MPEG4	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNB-7000	1.10_110819	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNB-6004	V1.0.0	H264	√	ONVIF
Sony	SNC-DH110	1.50.00	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-CH120	1.50.00	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-CH135	1.73.01	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-CH140	1.50.00	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-CH210	1.73.00	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-DH210	1.73.00	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-DH240	1.50.00	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-DH240-T	1.73.01	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-CH260	1.74.01	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-CH280	1.73.01	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-RH-124	1.73.00	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-RS46P	1.73.00	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-ER550	1.74.01	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-ER580	1.74.01	H264	√	ONVIF/Private
	SNC-ER580	1.78.00	H264	√	ONVIF
	SNC-VM631	1.4.0	H264	√	ONVIF
	WV-SP306	1.61.00	H264、MPEG4	√	SDK
	WV-SP306	1.61.00	H264	√	ONVIF
	SNC-VB600	1.5.0	H264	√	Private
	SNC-VM600	1.5.0	H264	√	Private
	SNC-VB630	1.5.0	H264	√	Private
	SNC-VM630	1.5.0	H264	√	Private
SANYO	VCC-HDN4000PC	—	H264	√	ONVIF

ZHEJIANG DAHUA VISION TECHNOLOGY CO.,LTD.

Address: No.1199, Bin'an Road, Binjiang District, Hangzhou, P.R. China

Postcode: 310053

Tel: [phone]

Fax: [phone]

Email:[e-mail]

Website: www.dahuasecurity.com